®
Sprint Service
Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
User Guide
© 2008 Sprint Nextel. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole or in
part without prior written approval. SPRINT and other trademarks are
trademarks of Sprint Nextel.
Printed in the U.S.A.
PN: 406-11294-01
v. 1.2
Prolonged Views of Screen: If you are driving, do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the
screen. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring
prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside
traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: The Device Software is only an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. The Device Software is not a substitute for your
personal judgment.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor the speech recognition functions and address any errors.
Table of Contents
Welcome to Sprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Where to Learn More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1A. Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Your Treo™ Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1B. Setting Up Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Turning Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1C. Connecting to Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Section 2: Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2A. Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using Your Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2B. Using the Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Accessing Your Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
What Can I Do When I’m On a Call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting Up and Managing Speed-Dial Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using a Phone Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Customizing Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Controlling Your Roaming Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3A. Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Accessing Sprint Power Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device as a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using Pocket Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Getting Started With Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Microsoft® Exchange Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Working With Email Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Working With Meeting Invitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Customizing Your Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using Windows LiveTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Customizing Your Internet Explorer® Mobile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3E. Using GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using Sprint Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3F. Using Wireless Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Section 4: Your Portable Media Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Synchronizing Pictures, Videos, and Music: Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Synchronizing Pictures, Videos, and Music: Windows Vista® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4B. Working With Your Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
About Your Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Taking Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Viewing Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Sending Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Organizing Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Adding a Picture to a Contact Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Customizing Your Pictures & Videos Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4C. Playing Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Synchronizing Windows Media® Player Library Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Playing Media Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Working With Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Working With Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Section 5: Your Wireless Organizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Synchronizing Microsoft® Office and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
PowerPoint® Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Excel® Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
OneNote® Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
PDF Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Section 6: Your Information and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
6A. Managing Files and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Using Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
6B. Synchronizing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Setting Up Wireless Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Other Ways to Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Stopping Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6C. Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Today Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Display and Appearance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Purchasing Accessories for Your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Section 7: Your Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7A. Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Transferring Information From Another Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Trouble Installing the Desktop Software on a Windows XP Computer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Resetting Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Third-Party Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Making Room on Your Treo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Section 8: Your Safety and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8A. Important Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Welcome to Sprint
Sprint and Nextel have come together, offering you more choice and flexibility to do whatever
you want, whenever you want.
This powerful combination brings you access to more products, more services, and more of
what you need to do more of what you want.
Welcome and thank you for choosing Sprint.
13
How to Use This Guide
We know you’re eager to start using your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device right away, and the
sections of this guide are designed to help you do just that.
Sprint service, and your computer.
service with quick, easy-to-follow instructions. This section also describes the phone
features on your device and shows you how to use Sprint service features such as
voicemail and call waiting.
use Web browsing, messaging, and email. It also describes other types of wireless
connections, such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® wireless technology.
Treo and how to transfer and listen to music files on your device.
full-featured organizer that gives you instant access to your Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,
Memos, Calculator, and more.
applications and the preferences that enable you to customize your Treo.
if something goes wrong. It also includes a helpful glossary of terms.
guidelines and lists the technical specifications for your Treo.
information that will help you safely use your phone. Failure to read and
follow the Important Safety Information in this phone guide may result in
serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.
WARNING
14
Where to Learn More
For a Quick Introduction
ⅷ
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour highlights many features of your Treo. It is already installed on
your Treo, and you can open it at any time. Press Start
, select MyTreo, select the
Support tab, and then select Quick Tour.
While Using Your Treo
ⅷ
Help: Many of the built-in applications include on-device Help, so that you can learn
about the tasks you can perform in that application. To access Help, go to the application
or screen you want help with, press Start
, and select Help.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support
Setup assistance from Palm: For help with setting up your Treo and getting up and
running, call 1-866-750-PALM (1-866-750-7256). This service is complimentary within 90
days of purchase. (Offer subject to change without notice.)
ⅷ
My Treo: Find setup tips and support info, including access to Palm’s knowledge library
and a version of this User Guide that you can view on your device. Press Start
, select
MyTreo.
If You Need More Information
ⅷ
Books: Many books on Windows Mobile® devices are available from local or online
ⅷ
Online forums: Consult online user discussion groups to swap information
about your Treo and learn about topics you may find nowhere else.
ⅷ
Sprint Customer Service: For questions about your account or features available on
15
Managing Your Account
ⅷ Access your account information.
ⅷ Check minute usage (depending on your Sprint service plan).
ⅷ View and pay your bill.
ⅷ Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.
ⅷ Purchase accessories.
ⅷ Shop for the latest Sprint phones.
ⅷ View available Sprint service plans and options.
ⅷ Learn more about Sprint Power VisionSM and other great products like games, ringtones,
screen savers, and more.
From the Today Screen on Your Treo
ⅷ Enter *4 and then press Phone/Talk
to check minute usage and account balance.
to make a payment.
ⅷ Enter *3 and then press Phone/Talk
ⅷ Enter *2 and then press Phone/Talk to access a summary of your Sprint service plan or
to get answers to other questions.
From Any Other Phone
ⅷ Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.
ⅷ Business Customer Service: 1-800-927-2199.
Sprint 411
You have access to a variety of services and information through Sprint 411, including
residential, business, and government listings; assistance with local or long-distance calls;
movie listings; and hotel, restaurant, shopping, and major local event information. There is a
per-call charge and you are billed for airtime.
then press Phone/Talk
to dial.
16
Sprint Operator Services
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance with placing collect calls or with placing calls
billed to a local telephone calling card or third party.
ⅷ Go to your Today screen, enter 0, and then press Phone/Talk
to dial.
To learn more and to see the latest in products and services, visit Sprint online at
17
18
20
What You Need
The box containing your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device includes the following:
Hardware
ⅷ Treo.
ⅷ Rechargeable battery.
ⅷ AC charger.
ⅷ USB sync cable.
ⅷ Stereo headset.
Documentation
ⅷ Get Started.
ⅷ Experience SprintSpeed.
ⅷ Basics Guide.
ⅷ Set Up Your Email.
ⅷ Terms & Conditions.
ⅷ Warranty.
ⅷ Software License Agreement.
Software
Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device, which includes the following:
ⅷ Desktop synchronization software.
ⅷ Additional software for your Treo.
ⅷ User Guide (this guide).
You also need the following items to complete the installation and activation:
ⅷ An activated Sprint service plan.
ⅷ A location with wireless coverage for your Treo.
ⅷ An electrical outlet.
ⅷ The computer with which you want to synchronize your information.
ⅷ Microsoft® Outlook® 2003 or later (sold separately), installed on the computer with which
you want to synchronize.
If you don’t have Outlook 2003 or later installed on your computer, insert the
Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device into your computer’s
Tip
CD drive, select Palm® Support Center, and then select Microsoft®
Outlook® 2007 (60-day trial) to download a trial version of this software.
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
23
Your Treo™ Smart Device
Front View
9
1
2
10
11
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
14
15
8
1. Indicator Light provides status information for your Treo based on the color of the light.
2. Volume Button adjust the volume level for the earpiece, speaker, and ringer.
3. Side Button opens the Notes application by default. You can also reassign this button to
4. Left Softkey gives you quick access to the options available for the current screen.
5. Phone/Talk dials a phone number that you select or enter, and answers an incoming
phone call. When you press Option
+ Phone/Talk , the Internet Explorer® Mobile
application opens.
6. Start opens the Start menu to access all the applications on your Treo. When you press
and hold Option + Start , the Camera application opens, so you can take a
picture or switch to video mode to record a video.
24
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
7. Calendar opens the Calendar application, so you can view and manage appointments.
When you press and hold Option + Calendar , the Contacts application opens.
8. Microphone serves as the mouthpiece on your Treo.
9. Earpiece lets you hear your phone calls. Hold the earpiece to your ear to listen, unless
you’re using the speakerphone or a headset.
10. Right Softkey gives you quick access to the options available for the current screen.
Typically, pressing this softkey opens a menu.
11. OK confirms any information you entered and closes the current screen. It then returns
you to the previous screen. When you press and hold Option
+ OK
, the Task
Manager screen opens.
12. Power/End turns the phone feature of your Treo on and off, wakes up and turns off the
screen, goes to the Today screen when the screen is already awake, and hangs up
calls.
13. Inbox opens the Inbox application, so you can write and read email messages. When
you press and hold Option
+ Inbox
, the Messaging application opens, so you
can write and read text messages.
14. 5-way Navigator with Center Button gives you one-handed access to move around on
After highlighting an item with the 5-way, you can select or activate it by pressing
Center
.
15. Option enables you to access the characters that appear above the letters on the
keyboard.
Be careful not to scratch or crush your Treo screen. Do not store it in a
place where other items might damage it. Visit
Tip
palm.com/treo800wsprint-support to find a variety of useful accessories,
including carrying cases that protect the screen.
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
25
Back View
4
5
6
1
2
7
3
8
1. Camera Lens enables you to take pictures using the built-in camera.
2. IR (Infrared) Port uses infrared technology to transmit information to and receive
information from other infrared-enabled devices that use compatible software.
3. Expansion Card Slot allows you to expand the capabilities of your Treo using a microSD
card or microSDHC card.
4. External Antenna Port enables you to connect an optional external antenna (sold
separately).
5. Self-Portrait Mirror enables you to include yourself in a picture.
6. Speaker plays ringtones and alarms, and serves as the speaker for the speakerphone
feature and other audio playback.
7. Battery Door protects the battery compartment.
8. MicroUSB Connector enables you to attach the sync cable, the AC charger, or a
hands-free headset to your Treo. Use only headsets that are compatible with your Treo.
26
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
The Treo speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep your device
away from credit cards or other items that could become demagnetized.
Important
Top View
1. Wi-Fi Button turns the Wi-Fi feature on and
off and enables you to search for and
connect to available Wi-Fi networks.
1
2
3
2. Ringer Switch controls the ringer setting.
When the Ringer switch is set to Sound
Off , it silences all sounds at once,
including music; so you don’t need to
navigate through menus to turn sounds on
and off. See “System Sound Settings” on
page 319 for details on changing the settings.
3. Stylus allows you to tap options on your Treo screen. To use the stylus, slide it out of the
slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil.
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
27
Inserting the Battery
Use only batteries and chargers that are approved by Sprint or Palm with
WARNING
your device. Failure to use an approved battery or charger may prevent your
device from turning on or charging; may void your Treo warranty; and may
increase the risk of your device overheating, catching fire, or exploding,
which may also result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.
1. Gently press the battery door while sliding it downward to remove it.
1
2
1
2
Battery Contacts
Device Contacts
2. Align the battery contacts with the device contacts, and then press the battery into place.
3. Slide the battery door onto the back of the Treo until it clicks into place. (Your device
screen turns on and the Palm logo screen appears. Wait for the progress bar on the
Palm logo screen to fill and for the Windows Mobile® screen to appear. If your Treo
doesn’t turn on, you need to charge it by connecting it to the AC charger. If it still doesn’t
28
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation.
For long trips or heavy use, buy a spare battery that is approved by Sprint
and is compatible with your Treo. Visit palm com/treo800wsprint-support
Tip
Charging the Battery
The battery comes with a sufficient charge for you to complete the setup process and activate
your phone. After activation, we recommend charging your Treo for 3.5 hours (or until the
indicator light is solid green) to give it a full charge. See “Maximizing Battery Life” on page 31
for tips on maximizing the life of the battery.
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
*
*
Indicator Light
2. Connect the charger cable to the microUSB connector on the bottom of the device.
Make sure the symbol on the cable is facing up, toward your Treo screen.
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
29
3. To confirm that your Treo is being charged, wait about 30 seconds and then check the
indicator light.
Ⅲ Solid red: Your Treo is being charged and the battery is less than 90% full.
Ⅲ Solid green: Your Treo is charged and the battery is at least 90% full.
If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few minutes for the indicator light to turn on when
you connect your Treo to the AC charger. If the indicator light still does not turn on,
double-check the cable connection and the electrical outlet to which it is connected.
Although it takes longer to charge, you can also charge your Treo through
your computer by connecting them with the sync cable (see “Synchronizing
With a USB Connection” on page 50). However, if the battery is fully drained,
you must use the AC charger.
Tip
Checking Battery Power
The onscreen battery icon displays the power status:
*
*
Battery Icon
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Lightning bolt
: Battery is being charged.
Gray lightning bolt
: Battery is connected to a power source and is fully charged.
Full battery
: Battery is fully charged.
30
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
ⅷ
ⅷ
Partial battery
: Battery has power but is partially drained.
: Battery needs to be charged immediately
Exclamation point
Tapping the battery icon opens a window showing the percentage level of
charge left in the battery.
Tip
Maximizing Battery Life
Battery life depends on how you use your Treo. Consumption factors include signal strength,
use of accessories with Bluetooth® wireless technology, speakerphone usage, and the type of
calls you make (data or voice). Increase battery life by following these easy guidelines:
ⅷ Charge your Treo whenever you’re at your desk, or charge it overnight each day. The
battery in your device has a much longer useful life when it is topped off frequently, versus
being charged after it is fully drained.
ⅷ If you spend a lot of time using the camera, games, media players, or other applications,
keep an eye on the battery icon and charge when necessary.
ⅷ The wireless features of your Treo(phone, email, messaging, Web, and any applications
that use a Sprint Power VisionSM or Wi-Fi connection) generally consume more power than
the nonwireless features (Calendar, Tasks, Notes). If you don’t plan to use the wireless
features on your device for a while, turn off your wireless services (see “Turning Wireless
Services On and Off” on page 340). You can forward calls to a different number or let all
wireless services (phone, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi) on and off, tap the signal-strength
icon, and then select Wireless Manager.
ⅷ If you sync email and other information directly with your corporate Exchange server
using Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync®, set the synchronization interval to a maximum of
every 15 minutes during peak times and every hour (or turned off completely) during
ⅷ Turn off the Bluetooth feature on your Treo when you do not need to make a Bluetooth
connection.
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
31
ⅷ By default, the Wi-Fi feature on your Treo disconnects and turns off when the screen is off.
If you change the default Wi-Fi settings, be sure to turn off the Wi-Fi feature when it is not
the Enable Power Savings option in Wi-Fi Settings to conserve battery power (see
ⅷ As with any wireless phone, if your phone is on and you’re in an area with no wireless
coverage, your Treo continues to search for a signal, and that consumes power. If you
cannot move to an area of better coverage, temporarily turn off your phone (see “Turning
ⅷ Keep your battery and your Treo away from direct sunlight and other sources of heat.
Temperatures over 113 degrees Farenheit (45 degrees Celsius) can permanently reduce
the capacity and life span of any lithium-ion battery.
If your battery becomes fully drained, your information remains safely stored
on your Treo. Recharge the battery to access your information.
Did you know?
32
Section 1A: Setting Up Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Turning Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device On and Off
Throughout this guide the terms Treo and device are used to describe the
physical aspects of your Treo. The term phone is used to describe the
feature of your Treo that enables you to connect to the Sprint National
Network.
Note
You can turn the phone and the screen of your Treo off and on separately. This means you
can wake up the screen to use just the organizer features of your device—such as Contacts,
Calendar, and other nonwireless applications—without turning on the phone. Also, when the
screen is turned off, the phone can be on and ready for you to receive calls or messages.
Waking Up the Screen and Turning It Off
Wake up the screen and leave the phone turned off when you want to use only the organizer
features of your Treo, for example, when you’re on a plane and want to look at your calendar.
You can also turn off the screen without turning off the wireless features of your Treo.
1. To wake up the screen, press any of the following buttons:
Ⅲ Power/End
Ⅲ Phone/Talk
Ⅲ Center
Ⅲ Start
Ⅲ Calendar
Ⅲ Inbox
2. Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
3. When you’re ready to turn off the screen, briefly press Power/End
to go to the Today
screen.
4. Briefly press Power/End
again to turn off the screen.
34
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
You can set how long the screen stays on during a period of inactivity. Press
Start, select Settings, select the System tab, and then select Power. Select
the Advanced tab, and then adjust the On battery power setting.
Tip
Turning Your Phone On and Off
When you turn on your phone, it connects to a wireless network so that you can make and
receive phone calls and use other wireless services.
1. If you are not on a call and your screen is off, briefly press Power/End
(or one of the
other wake-up keys listed in the previous section) to wake up the screen.
2. Press Center
on the 5-way to turn off Keyguard.
3. Press and hold Power/End
to turn on your phone. (When your Treo locates a signal,
icon appear at the top of the screen, indicating that
Sprint and the signal-strength
you can use the phone and Internet features, if supported by the local network.)
4. Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone. (When your phone is off,
icon appear at the top of the screen. Your Treo is not
Phone Off and the phone-off
connected to any wireless network, but you can still use the organizer and other
features.)
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On
, you hear a series of tones when you turn your
When the phone is on and the screen is off, the date and time screen saver
appears. You can disable the screen saver. Press Start, select Settings,
select the System tab, and then select Power. Select the Screen Saver tab,
and then uncheck the Enable Screen Saver box.
Tip
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
35
Making Your First Call
The battery comes with a sufficient charge for you to activate your Treo and make your first
call. After activation, we recommend charging your device for 3.5 hours (or until the indicator
light is solid green) to give it a full charge.
If you purchased your Treo at a Sprint Store, it probably has already been
activated. If your phone is not activated, see the Get Started poster for
details on activating your new device.
Before You
Begin
1. Press Power/End
to display your Today screen (see
2. If prompted, press Center
to turn off Keyguard (see
information).
4. Press the numbers on the keyboard to enter the phone
number you want to call.
5. Press Phone/Talk
to make the call.
6. If prompted, enter your four-digit lock code. (In most cases you are not prompted to
enter a lock code. For security purposes, the lock code is not visible as you type.)
If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of your
wireless phone number. If this doesn’t work, call Sprint Customer Service at
get help from Sprint if you are having trouble with your service.
Note
7. When your call is complete, press Power/End
to end the call.
36
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
*
*
Look Here for Your Phone Number
3. Press Menu
4. Select Preferences > Phone Settings.
5. On the Phone tab, look for your phone number below the title bar.
(right softkey).
6. Press OK
.
If your phone number doesn’t appear on the Phone Settings screen, press
OK, and then turn your phone off and back on again. Repeat steps 2
through 6. If your phone number still doesn’t appear, your phone has not
been activated. Turn your phone off, wait a few hours, and then repeat these
steps. If your phone number still does not appear, contact Sprint for
assistance at 1-888-211-4727.
Tip
38
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
Setting Up Your Voicemail
All unanswered calls to your Treo are automatically transferred to your voicemail, even if your
phone is in use or turned off.
To set up your voicemail:
1. If you do not see your Today screen, press Power/End
.
2. Press and hold 1 on the keyboard to dial Sprint’s voicemail
system.
3. Follow the voice prompts to do the following:
Ⅲ Create your password.
Ⅲ Record your name announcement.
Ⅲ Record your greeting.
Ⅲ Choose whether to activate Skip Pass Code—a feature
that lets you access your voicemail simply by pressing
and holding 1, bypassing the need for you to enter your password. (If you do not
activate Skip Pass Code, your Treo uses the Voicemail Pass Code feature, which
requires you to enter your password each time you want to access your voicemail.)
If you are concerned about unauthorized access to your voicemail account,
we recommend that you use the Voicemail Pass Code feature.
Note
For more information about using your voicemail, see “Using Voicemail” on page 83.
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
39
Creating Sprint Account Passwords
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal account information, your
voicemail account, and your Sprint Power VisionSM account. To ensure that no one else has
access to your information, you need to create passwords to protect your privacy.
Account Password
If you are the account owner, you create an account username and password when you sign
the Web site.) If you are not the account owner (if someone else receives the bill for your
Voicemail Password
You create your voicemail password when you set up your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your
Sprint Power VisionSM Password
With your Treo, you can choose to set up a Sprint Power Vision password. This optional
password can be used to authorize the purchase of Premium Services content and to protect
personal information on multiphone accounts.
Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.
40
Section 1B: Setting Up Service
Section 1C
Connecting to Your Computer
In This Section
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Synchronizing means that information that has been entered or updated in one place—your
Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device, your computer, or your corporate server—is automatically
updated in the other. There’s no need to enter information twice. Some types of
synchronization can happen on an automated schedule, so you don’t even have to think
about it.
After you get into the habit of synchronizing regularly, you can see what a powerful tool
synchronization is for transferring, updating, and backing up large amounts of information on
your Treo.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
41
Synchronization Methods
There are a number of ways to make synchronization occur. You can install desktop sync
software on your computer to synchronize, or you may be able to synchronize wirelessly with
an Exchange server. You can also maximize your sync options and sync with both an
Exchange server and desktop sync software.
Synchronizing With Desktop Sync Software
To synchronize the information between your Treo and your computer, the desktop
synchronization software must be installed on your computer and you must connect your
device to your computer using one of the following methods:
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Connect using the USB sync cable: When you connect your device to your computer
using the sync cable, synchronization begins automatically. (See “Synchronizing With a
Connect using Bluetooth® wireless technology: You must first set up the Bluetooth
Connect using infrared (IR) technology: You must first set up your computer to receive
infrared beams. (See “Synchronizing Over an Infrared Connection” on page 313.)
If you have a Windows® XP computer: The desktop sync software is called ActiveSync®
desktop software. You must install this software from the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo
800w smart device that came with your Treo, even if you have already installed a previous
If you have a Windows Vista® computer: The desktop sync software is called Windows Mobile
Device Center. This software may already be installed on your computer. However, we
recommend that you use the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device to ensure
that the sync software is properly installed. You can also use the CD to install this User Guide
on your computer and bonus software on your Treo.
42
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
Regardless of the desktop sync software you use, the sync application on your Treo is called
ActiveSync.
Synchronizing Wirelessly With the Server
You can set up your Treo to synchronize email and other information wirelessly with Microsoft®
Exchange Server 2007 or with Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2 using
you choose this method, synchronization takes place automatically after setup. You do not
need to install the software from the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device.
If you have a Windows XP computer, we recommend that you install the
desktop sync software from the CD even if you synchronize wirelessly with
the server. You need the desktop sync software to synchronize pictures,
videos, music files, and other information directly with your computer.
Note
What Can I Synchronize?
You must have Microsoft® Outlook® 2003 or later installed on your computer to synchronize
the information in these applications:
The information in these applications synchronizes with Outlook by default whether you use
desktop sync software or wireless synchronization with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
If you don’t already have Outlook installed on your computer, insert the CD
Tip
into your computer’s CD drive, select Palm® Support Center, and then
select Microsoft® Outlook® 2007 (60-day trial) to download a trial version of
this software.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
43
If you set up synchronization with the desktop sync software, information in the Favorites
application is synchronized by default as well.
Synchronizing Favorites gives you an easy way to get favorites from the Web
browser on your computer into the Web browser on your Treo. Just add
them to the folder called Mobile Favorites, which shows up in your
computer’s browser. When you sync, they become available on your device
as well. Backup copies of any favorites that you add on the Treo browser are
also stored in the Mobile Favorites folder.
Did you know?
You can choose which applications sync—provided the application appears in the sync list.
for example, you can choose not to sync Tasks. See “Changing Which Applications Sync” on
page 314 for details on choosing applications from the sync list.
You can also use the Files sync folder to sync files from applications that don’t appear in the
sync list. For example, you can sync files such as Microsoft® Word, Microsoft® Excel®,
Microsoft® PowerPoint®, Microsoft® OneNote® and Adobe Acrobat® (PDF) files, as well as
using the Files sync folder.
If you want to synchronize music, pictures, and videos from your Windows Media® Player
library, you need Windows Media Player 10 or later on your computer, in addition to desktop
synchronization software.
If you don’t have Windows Media Player installed on your computer,
Tip
If you want to synchronize with a personal information manager (PIM) other than Microsoft
Office Outlook, you must install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s vendor to learn
whether software is available for your Treo.
44
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
The following table lists the types of information you can synchronize and the methods to use.
Information type
Method
Where to learn more
Outlook Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks
Desktop sync software
(sync with computer) or
Exchange ActiveSync
(direct sync with server)
Outlook Email
Desktop sync software
or Exchange ActiveSync
Word, Excel,
PowerPoint,
OneNote, and
PDF files
Desktop sync software
Pictures, music
and video files
Desktop sync software
and Windows Media
Player
Outlook Notes
Desktop sync software
Files to be
transferred to an
expansion card
Desktop sync software
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
45
Setting Up Your Computer for Synchronization
Before you can synchronize, the desktop sync software must be installed and you must
connect the sync cable to your computer. If you have a Windows XP computer, you must
install the software that came with your Treo on the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w
smart device, even if you already have a previous version of the desktop sync software
installed on your computer.
System Requirements
Your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements:
ⅷ Windows XP Service Pack 2 or Windows Vista (later versions may also be supported).
ⅷ 32MB of available memory (RAM).
ⅷ 170MB of free hard disk space.
ⅷ CD drive.
ⅷ Available USB port.
ⅷ USB sync cable (included with your Treo).
ⅷ Adobe Flash Player (required for running the installation program).
If you do not have Adobe Flash Player on your computer, you can download
Tip
Installing ActiveSync® Desktop Software: Windows XP
If you have a Windows XP computer, the desktop sync software is called ActiveSync desktop
software. The Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device recognizes that you have a
Windows XP computer and automatically directs you to install ActiveSync desktop software.
On your Treo, the sync application is called ActiveSync.
46
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
Do the following:
Before You
Begin
•
If you are installing the software on a computer at work, make sure
your company allows you to install new software. Contact your
company’s IT department for help.
•
If you want to sync pictures, videos, and music from your Windows
Media Library, you must install Windows Media Player 10 or later
before you install ActiveSync desktop software.
1. Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those
running in the background. (Your computer must have all its resources available before
you can install the software.)
2. Insert the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device into the CD drive on your
computer.
3. Follow the installation instructions that appear on your computer. (When offered the
Wireless Synchronization” on page 308 for instructions on synchronizing with a server.)
During software installation, you can select an option to synchronize email,
contacts, calendar events, and tasks directly with your information stored on
a server running Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003
upgraded to Service Pack 2. If you choose this option, you are prompted to
enter your mail server address and domain name and your Exchange server
account username and password.
Tip
Setting Up Windows Mobile Device Center: Windows Vista®
If you have a Windows Vista computer, the desktop sync software is called Windows Mobile
Device Center. The Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device recognizes that you
have a Windows Vista computer, and directs you to install Windows Mobile Device Center (if it
is not already on your computer). On your Treo, the sync application is called ActiveSync.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
47
1. Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those
running in the background. (Your computer must have all its resources available before
you can install the software.)
2. Insert the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device into the CD drive on your
computer.
3. Follow the installation instructions that appear on your computer. (When offered the
Wireless Synchronization” on page 308 for instructions on synchronizing with a server.)
Using the Desktop Sync Software
After the desktop sync software is installed on your computer, synchronization happens
automatically anytime you connect your Treo to your computer, as described in the next
section. You can also open the desktop sync software window on your computer to perform
the following tasks:
Your Computer” on page 298) or to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card
ⅷ Change which applications synchronize.
ⅷ In ActiveSync desktop software on a Windows XP computer, enter settings to synchronize
wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or with Exchange Server 2003 upgraded
to Service Pack 2.
You can also change which applications synchronize (see “Changing Which
Applications Sync” on page 314) and enter settings to synchronize
Whether you enter changes on your Treo or on your computer, the changes
are transferred to the other location the next time you synchronize.
Did you know?
48
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
To open the desktop sync software, do one of the following:
Windows XP: To open the ActiveSync desktop software window, double-click the ActiveSync
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen. (If you don’t see the
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync to open the
ActiveSync window.)
You can set the ActiveSync window to open automatically when you
connect your computer and your Treo. In the ActiveSync window, select File
> Connection Settings, and then check the Open ActiveSync when my
device connects box.
Tip
The ActiveSync icon turns green when your device is connected to your
computer. The icon is gray when your Treo is not connected to your
computer.
Did you know?
Windows Vista: To open Windows Mobile Device Center, click Start > All Programs > Windows
Mobile Device Center.
Desktop software installation also creates a folder for your Treo on your computer. By default,
this folder is named MyTreo800 My Documents; the folder name changes when you assign
your Treo a name. When your device is connected to your computer, opening My Computer
or Windows Explorer (Windows XP) or Computer (Windows Vista) displays an icon
representing your Treo. Double-click this icon to display folders containing items you
synchronized, such as music files, pictures, and videos.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
49
Synchronizing With a USB Connection
Every time you connect your Treo to your computer, the desktop sync software automatically
turns on and checks whether changes you made on the computer or on the device need to
be synchronized.
Use the USB sync cable that came with your Treo. If you need to use a
replacement cable, make sure it is approved by Palm for use with your
Treo 800W smart device. Using an unapproved cable may cause sync errors.
Important
If you’re switching from a previous Windows Mobile® device or from a device
using Palm OS® by ACCESS, you can learn how to move content to your
Treo by going to palm com/treo800wsprint-support
Note
50
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
1. Plug the sync cable into a USB port or a powered USB hub on your computer.
*
*
Sync Cable
For best performance, plug your sync cable directly into a USB port on your
Tip
computer. If your computer has USB ports on both the front and back, we
suggest using the back port. If you use a USB hub, make sure it is a
powered hub.
2. Connect the sync cable to the bottom of your Treo.
Your Treo is being charged through your computer whenever the sync
Did you know?
cable is connected to a powered USB port on your computer. However, it
takes longer to charge your device through your computer than with the AC
charger that came with your Treo.
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
51
3. Check for synchronization progress: (If you don’t see the correct icons, make sure the
desktop synchronization software that came with your Treo is running on your
computer.)
Ⅲ On your Treo, look for the animated ActiveSync
Ⅲ On your computer, look for the animated Sync icon in the taskbar:
XP) or (Windows Vista).
icon at the top of your screen.
(Windows
If you have any problems synchronizing, see “Synchronization” on page 360 for
troubleshooting suggestions.
We recommend that you also use the includedSprite Backup utility to back
up your information. This backup-and-restore utility preserves the data and
settings that are not backed up during synchronization. Sprite Backup also
protects your data and settings if your Treo is ever lost or stolen, or if you
ever need to do a hard reset.
Tip
52
Section 1C: Connecting to Your Computer
54
Moving Around on the Screen
To move around on the Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device screen, you can use the 5-way
navigator or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. With use, you can find your own
favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select items.
Using the 5-way, press Right , Left , Up , or Down
Press Center to highlight and select items.
to move around on the screen.
1
5
4
2
3
1
Up
2
3
Right
Down
4
5
Left
Center
Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and
you must use the stylus instead.
Tip
The arrow icons that indicate directions on the 5-way are different from the
onscreen scroll arrows and the arrows that indicate that a list is available
56
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Scrolling Through Screens
As on a computer, on your Treo you scroll to move from field to field or from page to page,
or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list. There are several methods
of scrolling:
Up , or Down to move to the next field, button, or action in that direction.
(These keys work just like the Page Up and Page Down keys on a computer keyboard.)
,
ⅷ Press and hold Option
while pressing Left or Right to jump to the top or bottom of
the current screen.
ⅷ When viewing a screen with tabs, such as when adding a contact, press Down
to scroll
to the tabs, and then press Left or Right to move between tabs.
ⅷ When inside a text field, press Right or Left to move to the next character, and press
Up or Down to move between lines.
ⅷ When inside a list, press and hold Up
or Down
to rapidly scroll through the list.
ⅷ Tap an onscreen scroll arrow.
ⅷ Tap and drag the slider of an onscreen scroll bar.
1
2
1
2
Scroll Arrows
Slider
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
57
When you are using applications such as Inbox, Internet Explorer® Mobile,
and Word Mobile, press and hold Option while pressing Left or Right on the
5-way to go to the beginning or end of the current line.
Tip
Closing Screens
To accept the information you entered on a screen and to return to the previous screen, do
one of the following:
ⅷ Press OK
ⅷ Use the stylus to tap
not accessible using the 5-way.)
.
or
in the upper-right corner of the screen. (These buttons are
When you close a screen, the application still runs in memory. See “Viewing
Memory Usage” on page 338 for instructions on viewing the amount of
memory in use versus viewing the available memory. See “The Applications
Are Running Slower Than Usual” on page 353 for instructions on closing
applications and freeing up memory.
Note
Highlighting and Selecting Items
On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by default.
The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action. Use the 5-way to move the
highlight from one item to another before opening or selecting it.
The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is highlighted:
ⅷ
Border: This rectangular border highlights items such as an onscreen button (OK,
Dismiss, or Hide), a check box, an option, or a Web link.
*
*
Border
58
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
ⅷ
Light text on a dark background: This highlights items such as a phone number, an email
address, text, or an item in a list.
After highlighting an item with the 5-way, you can select or activate it by pressing Center
or by tapping the item with the stylus.
The best way to learn to use the 5-way is to experiment. Press the 5-way
buttons, and as you do, follow the movement of the border around the
screen. The behavior of the 5-way varies slightly in each application.
Tip
Highlighting Text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen:
ⅷ Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.
ⅷ To highlight a word, double-tap it.
ⅷ To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
When text is highlighted, you can press Backspace to delete the
highlighted text.
Tip
Using the Softkeys
The left and right softkeys give you quick access to tasks that you can do on the current
screen, so the softkey items vary from application to application and from screen to screen.
Look on the screen directly above the softkeys to see the actions that they make available in
the current application. If you don’t see a label above these keys, the keys are inactive from
the current screen. In most cases the right softkey opens the menu and the left softkey
activates a specific item, such as New or Edit. Remember that softkey functions vary from
screen to screen, so be sure to check the onscreen label before pressing the softkeys.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
59
1
2
1
2
Left Softkey Activates This Item
Right Softkey Activates This Item
Selecting Menu Items
In many applications, a menu provides access to additional features. The menu is hidden
until you press Menu (right softkey). To get the most out of your Treo, it’s a good idea to
familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the menu in various
applications.
1. Press Menu
(right softkey).
or Down to highlight a menu item.
2. Press Up
3. If an arrow appears next to a menu item, press Center
or Right to display additional options for that item, and
then press Up
or Down
to highlight a menu item. (To
return to the main menu without making a selection, press
Left .)
4. Press Center
or Menu
to select the menu item, or press Left
(right softkey) to close the menu and cancel
your selection.
60
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
You can select most menu items by pressing a key on the keyboard. To
quickly access a menu item, press Menu (right softkey) followed by the
underlined letter in the menu item’s name.
Did you know?
Selecting Items in a Shortcut Menu
Most applications also provide access to context-sensitive
shortcut menus—similar to the right-click menus on a computer.
The shortcut menu items vary based on the highlighted
selection.
1. Highlight the item or text for which you want to see a
shortcut menu.
2. Press and hold Center
to open the shortcut menu.
to highlight a menu item.
3. Press Up
or Down
4. Press Center
to select the menu item or press Left to
cancel your selection.
You can also tap and hold the stylus on an item to open the shortcut menu.
Tip
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
61
Selecting Options in a List
Lists enable you to select from a range of options. You can identify whether a list is available
when you select the field. If a rectangle appears around the field, along with a
downward-pointing arrow, a list is available. Lists are different from the menus described
earlier in this section.
When selecting fields, you might not see the downward-pointing arrow until
you press Center on the 5-way. In fields where you see a
downward-pointing arrow but no rectangle, you must tap the arrow with the
stylus to display the list.
Tip
You can do any of the following with a list:
ⅷ Use the 5-way to highlight the field, and then press Center
to display the items in the
list. Press Up
or Down
to highlight the item you want, and then press Center to
make your selection.
ⅷ Use your stylus to tap the arrow, and then tap the item in the list.
ⅷ Press Left to exit the list and cancel your selection.
62
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Using the Keyboard
When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the Treo with two hands and to
use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys.
4
5
1
2
6
7
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Option
Shift
Space
Backlight
Backspace
Return
Alt
Understanding the Backlight
Your Treo includes both a keyboard backlight and a screen backlight for low light conditions.
Both backlights turn on when you turn on the screen. The keyboard backlight turns off
automatically after 30 seconds. When you use the keyboard again and the screen is already
awake, the keyboard backlight turns on for another 30 seconds.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
63
The screen backlight remains on until there is no keyboard activity for 30 seconds, and then
the screen dims. The screen backlight turns off automatically when the screen turns off or
when you are on a call or playing music in the background for longer than the time specified
in Backlight Settings. The screen backlight also turns off when an application’s power-saving
features turn it off. You can set different shut-off intervals depending on whether the Treo is
operating on battery power or is connected to an external power source.
To change the screen backlight shut-off interval, do the following:
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Backlight
.
3. On the Battery Power tab, select a shut-off interval from the list.
4. Select the External Power tab and select a shut-off interval from the list.
5. Press OK
.
You can also adjust the backlight brightness. See “Adjusting the Brightness”
on page 322 for details.
Tip
Entering Lowercase and Uppercase Letters
By default, the first letter of each sentence or field is capitalized and the remaining text you
enter is lowercase. To enter other uppercase letters, do one of the following:
ⅷ Press Shift
entering a letter. When Shift is active, this symbol appears at the bottom of the screen: .)
ⅷ Press Shift twice to turn on Caps Lock, and then enter a series of letters. (When Caps
Lock is on, this symbol appears at the bottom of the screen: . To turn off Caps Lock,
and then enter a letter. (You don’t need to press and hold Shift while
press Shift
again.)
You can turn off the first-letter capitalization setting. For details see “Setting
Tip
64
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Entering Numbers, Punctuation, and Symbols
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys. To enter these
characters, do one of the following:
ⅷ Press Option
and then press the key of the desired character. (You don’t need to hold
Option while pressing the key. When Option is active, this symbol appears at the bottom of
the screen: .)
ⅷ Press Option
twice to turn on Option Lock, and then press the desired keys to enter a
series of characters. (When Option Lock is on, this symbol appears at the bottom of the
screen: . To turn off Option Lock, press Option again.)
When you enter a phone number in the Dial Lookup field on the Today
screen, you don’t need to press Option to enter numbers or the # and *
symbols.
Did you know?
Entering Passwords
You can't see your password as you enter it, so be careful. Be sure Caps Lock and Option
Lock are not on unless you need them. For information on how to enter characters, see
Entering Other Symbols and Accented Characters
You can enter symbols and accented characters that don't appear on the keys by using the
alternate characters list.
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
65
1. Press Alt
to display the alternate characters list.
2. Narrow the list by pressing the key that corresponds to the character you want. (See the
following table for a list of corresponding characters.)
The alternate characters are grouped according to their similarity to the
corresponding key. For example, the alternate character available for the R
key is ® and for the T key is ™. If you press the wrong key, press
Backspace to return to the full list of alternate characters. You can then
press another key.
Tip
3. Press Up
or Down
to highlight the desired character.
4. Press Center
to insert the character.
If you don’t know which key to press to narrow the list when entering a symbol, you can scroll
through the full list until you find the character you want.
If you want to enter an underscore (_), select it from the list that appears
when you press Alt by itself.
Tip
66
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Symbols and Accented Characters
to select…
Press Alt
and then press…
a
á à ä â ã å æ
A
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ
b or B
ß
c
ç ¢ ©
C
Ç ¢ ©
d
† ‡
D
† ‡ Ð
e
é è ë ê
E
É È Ë Ê
i
í ì ï î
I
Í Ì Ï Î
l or L
£
n
ñ
N
Ñ
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ
p or P
r or R
s
¶
®
ß š
ß Š
™
S
t or T
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
67
to select…
Press Alt
u
and then press…
ú ù ü û
U
Ú Ù Ü Û
x or X
y
x ¤
ý ÿ
Y
Ý Ÿ
0
°
1 ( + E)
2 ( + R)
3 ( + T)
! ( + J)
$ ( + H)
; ( + K)
? ( + N)
1 ¼ ½
2
3 ¾
¡
€ £ ¥ ¢
: :-) :-( ;-)
¿
Press Alt
by itself to select these additional characters: _ • % = ÷ ^ [ ] { } < > « » ~ \ Ø μ |
68
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Opening and Closing Applications
Using the Buttons
The front of the Treo has four buttons that you can use to open and close applications.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Start
Calendar
OK
Inbox
Each of the buttons has two functions. To use a button’s primary function, simply press the
button. To use a button’s secondary function, press and hold Option while you press the
button. Pressing Phone/Talk or any of the buttons (except OK) automatically wakes up your
Button
Primary Function
Start menu
Secondary Function
+
+
+
+
Camera
Calendar
Contacts
OK (close window)
Inbox
Task Manager
Messaging
You can open Internet Explorer Mobile by pressing and holding Option
while pressing Phone/Talk. You can also customize many of the functions
Did you know?
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
69
Using the Start Menu
You can access all the applications on your Treo through the Start menu:
1. Press Start
to open the Start menu.
2. Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the application you want to use. (To view additional
applications, select Programs.)
If an application appears in the Start menu, it does not appear in the
Programs folder. For example, you see File Explorer when you press Start,
but you do not see File Explorer when you select Programs.
Note
3. Press Center
to open the highlighted application.
4. (Optional) Press OK
to return to the previous screen. (The current application
continues to run in the background.)
page 324 for details.
Did you know?
70
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
With the Start menu open, you can press the letter underlined in the
application’s name to open the application. For example, press H to open
Help. You can also use the 5-way to select the shortcut icons at the top of
the Start menu when you want to open recently used applications.
Tip
In Programs, press a letter to jump to the first application that begins with
that letter. For example, press C to jump to Calculator. Press C again to
jump to Camera, and so on.
Closing Applications
You can have several applications open at once, so you don’t need to exit an application to
open another one. In most cases, applications close automatically when available memory is
low, but you can also close applications manually.
1. Press and hold OK
to open Task Manager.
2. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ Select the application you want to close and press End Task
(left softkey).
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey) and select End All Tasks to close all your
applications.
If you press OK to leave an application, the current application continues to
run in the background. Manually closing applications helps conserve battery
power and frees up memory.
Note
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
71
Using Your Today Screen
From your Today screen you can quickly look up a contact, make a call, see your latest
calendar appointments, see the number of unread email messages, and do a Web search.
ᮣ
To access your Today screen, press Power/End
.
You can also access your Today screen by pressing Start and selecting
Today.
Tip
1
2
3
4
5
6
page 107 to learn about the icons that appear in this area.
2. Dial Lookup: Enter a few letters of a contact’s name to look up a number, or simply
enter the number itself. Press Phone/Talk or Center
to make the call. See “Dialing
by Contact Name” on page 77 for more information.
3. Point of Interest Lookup: Enter the type of location you want to find and press
Center
to view a list of search results. See “Finding a Point of Interest” on page 182
for details.
72
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
4. Speed-Dial Entries: Select a speed-dial button—either a picture or text—to call the
number assigned to it. (Speed-dial buttons are not displayed by default; see “Selecting
Which Items Appear on Your Today Screen” on page 319 to learn how to show or hide
speed-dial buttons. To learn how to create your own speed-dial buttons, see “Setting Up
5. Inbox Status: View the number of unread email messages for each of your email
accounts. Select this field to open the Inbox application.
6. Messaging Status: View the number of unread text messages. Select this field to open
the Messaging application.
Scroll down to access more fields:
7
8
7. Live Search: Enter a term you want to look up, and press Center
or Return
to
view a list of search results from the Internet (data services connection required).
8. Calendar Status: View upcoming appointments. Select this field to open the Calendar
application.
You can select a picture for your Today screen background and select which items appear on
You can access the Today screen during a call by pressing Down to
minimize Active Call view. To return to Active Call view, select it on the
Today screen (just below the Dial Lookup field).
Did you know?
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
73
74
Section 2A: Moving Around on Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Accessing Your Today Screen
You can make and receive calls and store speed-dial entries right from your Today screen.
1. To go to your Today screen, press Power/End
.
Making Calls
Your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device offers several ways to make phone calls. Try them all to
discover which methods you prefer.
Dialing With the Keyboard
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Using the numbers on the keyboard, enter a phone
number.
3. Press Phone/Talk
to dial.
You do not need to press Option to access the numbers on
the keyboard. However, when dialing short numbers, such as
411, the Dial Lookup feature may display a list of contacts that
include the short number. In this case, select the entry you
want and press Phone/Talk
to make the call.
76
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Dialing by Contact Name
You can look up contacts quickly by entering just a few letters of
a contact’s name directly from your Today screen. Before you can
dial a call by contact name, you must create some contacts (see
“Adding a Contact” on page 238) or import them by
2. Use the keyboard to type the first or last name of the
contact you want to call. (If you enter both the first and last
name [or the first letters of each], enter a space between
the two names.)
To delete letters when correcting a misspelled name, press Backspace.
Tip
3. After you find the contact you want, select the number you want to call.
4. Press Phone/Talk
After you look up a contact, you can select how you want to communicate with that person.
Highlight the contact’s name, press Center (or tap and hold with the stylus), and then
select the communication method you want to use.
to make the call.
To see a contact’s address, company, and other details, highlight the name,
press Center on the 5-way, and then select Open Contact.
Tip
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
77
Dialing With a Speed-Dial Button
Before you can use a speed-dial button, you must create some
speed-dial entries. See “Setting Up and Managing Speed-Dial
You can make a call with your speed-dial buttons by doing any
of the following:
ⅷ Highlight a speed-dial button with the 5-way, and then press
Center
.
ⅷ Tap a speed-dial button with the stylus.
ⅷ Press and hold a Quick Key that you assigned to the
speed-dial button.
By default, speed-dial buttons do not appear on the Today screen. When your speed-dial
buttons are hidden, you can still use your Quick Keys to call a speed-dial number. To learn
how to display your speed-dial buttons, see “Selecting Which Items Appear on Your
Today Screen” on page 319. When your speed-dial buttons are visible, you can see more
speed-dial buttons by highlighting the picture speed-dial area and pressing Right or Left
repeatedly, or by highlighting the text speed-dial area and pressing Up , Down , Right
,
or Left
.
You can dial an another number for a contact with a speed-dial button.
Highlight the speed-dial button, press and hold Center on the 5-way, and
then select a number from the shortcut menu.
Did you know?
78
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Dialing by Company Name
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Contacts.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select View By >
Company.
4. Press Power/End
to return to your Today screen.
5. Using the keyboard, begin entering the first few letters of
the company name.
6. Select the number you want to dial.
7. Press Phone/Talk
to dial.
Dialing From a Web Page or Message
Your Treo recognizes most phone numbers that appear on Web
pages or in messages (text or email).
1. Press Up
or Down
to highlight the phone number
you want to dial on the Web page or in the message.
2. Press Center
to open the Phone dialog box, and then
select Yes to dial.
If you can’t dial a phone number directly from a Web page or a message,
then highlight the number, press and hold Center on the 5-way, and select
Copy. Open the Dial Pad, and then press and hold Center on the 5-way to
Paste. Press Phone/Talk to dial.
Tip
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
79
Redialing a Recently Called Number
ⅷ
To dial the last number you called: Go to your Today screen, and then press and hold
Phone/Talk
.
ⅷ
To select from your most recently dialed numbers: Go to your Today screen, press
Phone/Talk , highlight the number or contact name you want to call, and then press
Phone/Talk to dial. (If more than one number is associated with a contact, highlight the
contact and press Right to access any alternate numbers for that contact.)
ⅷ
To select from a chronological list of calls: Go to your Today screen, press Phone/Talk
and then select Call Log. (Highlight the number you want to call, and then press Call
[left softkey] to dial.)
,
You can also access the Call Log and Dial Pad from the Today screen by
pressing Menu (right softkey) and selecting Call Log or Dial Pad.
Tip
You can clear the list of recently dialed numbers. From the Call Log, press
Menu (right softkey) and select Delete Redial List.
Did you know?
80
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Dialing Using the Onscreen Dial Pad
The onscreen Dial Pad provides large numbers that you can tap
with your finger or stylus. The numbers also include the
corresponding letters so you can dial numbers that are
expressed as letters.
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
3. Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number.
4. Press Phone/Talk to dial.
(right softkey) and select Dial Pad.
You can paste numbers directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from
another application, switch to Dial Pad, press and hold Center on the
5-way, and then select Paste to insert the number in the Dial Pad.
Did you know?
Receiving Calls
To receive calls, your phone must be on.
To answer a call, do one of the following:
ⅷ Press Phone/Talk
.
ⅷ Press Answer
(left softkey).
ⅷ If the headset is attached, press the headset button.
See a picture of the person calling you. Learn how to assign a caller ID
Tip
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
81
To ignore a call and send it to voicemail, do one of the following:
ⅷ Press Power/End
.
ⅷ Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Ignore.
You can also ignore a call and send a text message. Press Menu (right
softkey) and select Ignore with text message. During a voice call you can
send text messages, but you cannot use data features such as Web
browsing and sending and receiving email.
Tip
To silence the ringer while your device is ringing, do any of the following:
ⅷ Press any key or button except Phone/Talk, Power/End, Start, OK, or Alt.
ⅷ Use the Volume button to turn the ringer sound all the way down.
ⅷ Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off
to immediately silence all system sounds
including the ringer. (Your Treo vibrates briefly when you set the Ringer switch to Sound
Off
. All sounds remain off until you slide the Ringer switch back to Sound On
to answer the call, press
to send the call directly to voicemail, or let it ring through to voicemail.
.)
When you silence the ringer, you can either press Phone/Talk
Power/End
Tip
If music is playing when a call arrives, the music pauses as soon as the
device starts ringing, and remains paused during your call. Music playback
resumes automatically when the call ends or the ringing stops. The
Windows Media® Player screen remains on if you don’t answer the call, and
it closes if you do. When playback resumes, the Windows Media Player
screen remains in the background even after playback resumes.
When you are on a plane, you can turn off your phone and all wireless
Off” on page 340). But you can still wake up the screen and use any
application that doesn’t require wireless services, like the calendar, music
player, and games. You can even read and write email and text messages
while your phone is off, but you cannot send or receive email or text
messages.
Did you know?
82
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Using Voicemail
Your voicemail number is preset when you activate your device. The first time you call
voicemail, you are prompted to create your voicemail password. If necessary, please contact
Sprint for assistance with your voicemail password.
Setting Up Voicemail
2. Press and hold 1 on the keyboard to dial the Sprint voicemail system.
3. Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.
If your speed-dial buttons are visible, you can tap the Voicemail speed-dial
button with your stylus to call the Sprint voicemail system. See “Selecting
Which Items Appear on Your Today Screen” on page 319 to learn how to
display your speed-dial buttons.
Tip
Retrieving Voicemail From a Notification
You can retrieve voicemail messages when you receive a notification, or you can dismiss the
notification and retrieve the messages later.
When you have a new voicemail message, the following
notification appears:
ⅷ To hear your message now, press Listen
(right softkey).
(left
ⅷ To retrieve your message later, press Dismiss
softkey).
Retrieving Voicemail Messages From the Today Screen
When you have unretrieved voicemail messages, the Missed Call
icon appears on the
screensaver, and when the screen is awake, a Voicemail
icon also appears at the top of
your screen.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
83
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press and hold 1 on the keyboard to call the Sprint voicemail system.
3. Enter your voicemail password using the keyboard, or press Extra Digits
(left
softkey) if you defined this option (see “Creating a Speed-Dial Button” on page 92
for details).
4. Select Play
to listen to your messages.
5. Use any of the following onscreen controls while listening
to your messages:
Play the previous message.
Save the current message.
Play the current message.
Delete the current message.
Repeat the current message.
Play the next message.
You do not need to press Option to enter numbers, *, or # while checking voicemail or during
any other call that requires interaction with an automated voice system.
When a Voicemail icon appears at the top of the screen, you can tap the
icon to retrieve your voicemail.
Tip
If you have trouble accessing a voicemail system, try changing the Dial Pad
Note
84
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Clearing the Voicemail Icon
After you retrieve your voicemail messages, the Voicemail icon at
the top of your screen usually disappears. If it doesn’t, you can
clear the Voicemail icon manually.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. Select the Services tab.
4. Select Clear Voicemail Icon and then press Center
.
What Can I Do When I’m On a Call?
When you make or receive a call, Active Call view appears on your Today screen.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Current Duration of Call
Caller’s Name and Number
Mute
Speakerphone
When a call lasts longer than 30 seconds, the screen dims. To wake up the
screen, press any key, except Power/End.
Tip
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
85
During a call, you can do any of the following:
ⅷ
Navigate around the Today screen: Press Down
field on the Today screen (just below the Dial Lookup field). Then press Up
to move around on the Today screen. To expand Active Call view to its original size,
to minimize Active Call view into a
or Down
highlight it and press Center
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Put the call on hold: Press Hold
(left softkey). (To take the call off hold, press Off
Hold
Use the speakerphone: Select Speakerphone
select .)
Mute the microphone so you can’t be heard: Select Mute
back on, select Mute .)
Switch to another application: Press Start
[left softkey].)
. (To turn off the Speakerphone,
. (To turn the microphone
and select the application. (You can also
press Calendar
or Inbox
to switch to those applications.)
You can send and receive text messages during a call. This is a great way to
stay connected with colleagues during a long call.
Did you know?
Returning to a Call From Another Application
You can use many other applications on your Treo while holding a phone conversation,
including the organizer and Messaging features. However, to browse the Web or check email
during a call, you must connect to a Wi-Fi network. You cannot use the Sprint network to
open a Mobile Broadband (EVDO) or Sprint 1xRTT data connection during a call; you can
use the Sprint network for one activity at a time: phone or data. How can you tell which kind of
network you’re connected to? See “Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status” on
ᮣ
From any application, press Phone/Talk
to return to Active Call view on your
Today screen.
86
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Ending a Call
Do one of the following:
ⅷ Press Power/End
.
ⅷ Press the headset button (if the headset is attached and has a button on it). (Some
headsets do not have a button.)
Saving Phone Numbers
After you complete a call, you are prompted to add the number if it is not already in your
Contacts list.
ⅷ To create a new contact for this number, select Create New
Contact.
ⅷ To add this number to an existing contact, select Copy and
Add and then select a contact name.
ⅷ To decline adding the number, press Dismiss
(left
softkey).
ⅷ To permanently disable the Add Contact prompt, select Don’t show this again.
If an incoming call uses caller ID blocking, you do not see the Add Contact
prompt.
Did you know?
Tip
You can turn the Add Contact prompt on and off at any time. From your
Today screen, press Menu (right softkey) and select Preferences > Phone
Settings. On the Phone tab, check the After calls from numbers that are
not in Contacts, ask if I want to add them box to turn on the Add Contact
prompt, or uncheck this box to turn off the Add Contact prompt.
If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later:
2. Highlight the number you want to save.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
87
3. Press and hold Center
to open the shortcut menu, and then select Save to Contacts.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. Press OK
.
You can also save contact information from other applications, such as
Messaging.
Tip
Forwarding Calls
You can forward calls to another phone number. Please check with Sprint about availability
and pricing of forwarded calls; additional charges may apply.
2. Enter *72 followed by the number to which you want to forward your calls. (For example:
*724155551234)
3. Press Phone/Talk . (A confirmation tone sounds.)
4. When you’re ready to turn off call forwarding, dial *720 and then press Phone/Talk
.
If *72 and *720 do not turn call forwarding on and off, please contact Sprint
to obtain the forwarding codes for your area.
Tip
After you turn on call forwarding, call your Treo to confirm that call
forwarding is active.
Managing Multiple Calls
Your Treo offers many advanced telephone features, including call waiting and three-way
calling. When you’re handling multiple calls at the same time, keep the following in mind:
ⅷ When you’re on a call, you can make a second call and create a three-way conference
call, but you cannot swap between the two calls.
88
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
ⅷ When you’re on a call and a second call comes in, you can swap between the two calls,
but you cannot create a three-way conference call.
ⅷ When two calls are active, you can return to the first call by asking the person on the
second call to hang up, or you can hang up both calls by pressing Power/End
.
Answering a Second Call (Call Waiting)
When you’re on a call and you receive a second call, the call-waiting notification appears.
You can do any of the following:
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Place the first call on hold and answer the new call: Press Answer
Phone/Talk
(left softkey) or
.
Send the new caller a text message: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Ignore
with text message.
Hang up the first call: Press Power/End . (The second call becomes an incoming call
alert, which you can choose to answer or ignore.)
Send the new call to voicemail: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Ignore.
Making a Second Call
You can make a second call while your first call is still active.
1. Press Hold (left softkey) to put the first call on hold.
2. To dial a second number, use any of the methods
by contact name or with the keyboard, you must first use
the 5-way to select the Dial Lookup field.)
When two calls are active, your Today screen includes two call
status sections, each representing one of the calls.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
89
Making a Conference Call
When you’re on a call, you can make a second call and create a
three-way conference call. Additional charges may apply, and
minutes in your account may be deducted for each active call.
Please contact Sprint for more information.
1. Put the first call on hold, and then place a second call.
2. Press Conference
(left softkey); this joins you and the
two other calls in a conference.
3. After you finish, press End conference
(left softkey);
this ends the second call and returns you to the first call.
(If you’re ready to hang up both calls, press Power/End
instead.)
If one of the people you called hangs up, you and the remaining caller stay
Did you know?
connected. The screen does not change to indicate that one of the callers
has hung up. If you initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all three
callers are disconnected.
Using Flash Mode During a Call
Flash mode is an alternate way to manually manage your calls while one or more calls are
active. The preferred methods are described in “Making a Second Call” on page 89,
page 90. Flash mode is often used during a conference call when one of the calls has ended
but the other remains connected.
1. While a call is in progress, press Phone/Talk
from Active Call view.
2. Select Send Key (Flash) to enter Flash mode.
90
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
3. Depending on the state of your active call, pressing Flash
(left softkey) or the
headset button (if the headset is attached and has a button on it) does one of the
following:
Ⅲ If you have two independent active calls (not a conference call), you can swap
between them if the second call is an incoming call.
Ⅲ If you have one active call, you can dial another number. You can press Flash
(left softkey) again to set up a conference call.
Ⅲ If you have two calls in conference with you, press Flash
(left softkey) to hang
up the second call, and then dial another number to create a new three-way
conference call.
4. Press Power/End
to exit Flash mode and end all calls.
Setting Up and Managing Speed-Dial Buttons
Your Treo lets you create both picture and text speed-dial buttons so that you can use Quick
Keys or select a button on the Today screen to quickly dial a number.
When you highlight a speed-dial button and press and hold Center on the
5-way, you can choose another number for that contact. For example, if you
create a speed-dial button for your friend Steve’s home phone number, you
can highlight Steve’s speed-dial button, press and hold Center, and then
choose his wireless number instead of his home number.
Did you know?
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
91
Creating a Speed-Dial Button
You can create up to 20 picture buttons and 50 text buttons. By
default, speed-dial buttons do not appear on the Today screen.
To learn how to display your speed-dial buttons, see “Selecting
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select New Speed Dial.
3. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ Select Link to contact, select the contact you want to
link to this button, and then select the number you want to dial with this button.
Ⅲ Select Label and enter a name for this button, and then select Number and enter
the phone number you want to dial with this button.
You can enter additional numbers to dial, such as a password or extension.
(You can also enter the star [*] and pound [#] symbols.) To enter a
one-second pause, enter a comma [,]. To enter a two-second pause,
enter p. To indicate that you want to press the Extra Digits softkey before
dialing the additional numbers, enter w followed by the additional numbers.
Did you know?
4. If this button is linked to a contact entry with a picture, select either Text Speed Dial or
Picture Speed Dial to indicate which type of button you want to create.
You can add a special ringtone to a contact associated with the speed-dial
Tip
92
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
5. (Optional) Select the Advanced tab and set any of the
following options:
Ⅲ Quick Key. When the Today screen is displayed, you
can press and hold the Quick Key to instantly dial this
number—even if your speed-dial buttons are hidden.
(Quick Keys can be letters or numbers, but you can’t
use both the letter and number for the same key. For
example, the voicemail Quick Key is 1. The letter
equivalent for that key is E, so you cannot assign E as a
Quick Key to another speed-dial button. You can create
up to 50 Quick Keys for speed-dial buttons and 20 Quick Keys for picture speed-dial
buttons.)
Ⅲ Show voice mail buttons: Display voicemail playback controls after you dial this
speed-dial number. (When this option is checked, you can enter numbers below
each control to tailor the controls to your voicemail system. You cannot select these
controls with a stylus.)
Play the previous message.
Save the current message.
Play the current message.
Delete the current message.
Repeat the current message.
Play the next message.
6. Press OK
.
The playback controls for the Sprint Voicemail speed-dial button are already
set up for the Sprint voicemail system. You can also create speed-dial
buttons for other voicemail systems, such as your office or home, and you
can set the voicemail playback controls to work with those voicemail
systems.
Tip
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
93
Editing a Speed-Dial Button
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Speed Dial Options.
3. Highlight the speed-dial button you want to edit.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
5. Make the desired changes.
6. Press OK
.
If your speed-dial buttons are visible, you can edit a speed-dial button by
highlighting the button you want to edit, pressing and holding Center to
open the shortcut menu, and then selecting Edit Speed Dial.
Tip
Deleting a Speed-Dial Button
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Speed Dial Options.
3. Highlight the speed-dial button you want to delete.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete.
5. Select Yes to confirm deletion.
Arranging Your Speed-Dial Buttons
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Speed Dial Options.
3. Highlight the button you want to move.
4. Press Option
+ Up , Down , Right , or Left to move the button in that
direction.
5. Press OK
.
94
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Using a Phone Headset
You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation.
If driving while using a phone is permitted in your area, we recommend
Important
using a headset or a hands-free car kit (sold separately). However, be aware
that use of a headset that covers both ears impairs your ability to hear other
sounds. Use of such a headset while operating a motor vehicle or riding a
bicycle may create a serious hazard to you and/or others, and may be
illegal. If you must use a stereo headset while driving, place a speaker in
only one ear. Leave the other ear free to hear outside noises, and use the
headset only if it is legal and you can do so safely.
To charge your Treo while using a wired headset, you must use a Palm Treo
800 Power/Audio Adapter (sold separately). For information on this
Note
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
95
1
2
3
1
2
3
Microphone
Headset Button
Speakers
The headset button is context-sensitive, and it performs various actions based on the
situation. You can press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks:
ⅷ Answer an incoming call.
ⅷ Respond to call waiting.
ⅷ Hang up all calls.
ⅷ Swap between calls if the second call is an incoming call.
ⅷ Create a conference call if the second call is an outgoing call.
96
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Headset Specifications
You can use the headset that came with your Treo or compatible third-party headsets. Here
are tips for selecting a headset:
ⅷ Your Treo works with headsets that have a microUSB standard B connector that is USB
2.0 compatible. To use a headset with a 2.5mm, 3-pin connector, you must attach an
adapter (sold separately).
ⅷ When in doubt, ask the third-party headset manufacturer if the product is compatible with
your Treo 800W smart device. (If you hear a headset buzz or poor microphone
performance, your headset may be incompatible with your Treo.)
ⅷ Headsets designed for previous Treo smart devices are not compatible with the Treo 800W
smart device.
The stereo headset included with your device allows you to listen to music
in stereo. You do not need to use a stereo adapter. For more information on
Tip
Using a Hands-Free Device With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Your Treo is also compatible with many headsets enabled with Bluetooth® wireless
technology version 1.2 or 2.0. For a list of compatible hands-free devices with Bluetooth
You can use a stereo Bluetooth headset that is A2DP-enabled to listen to
MP3 files on your Treo. You cannot, however, use a mono Bluetooth headset
to listen to MP3 files.
Note
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
97
Before you can transfer a call between your Treo (with or without a wired
headset) and a Bluetooth hands-free device, the Bluetooth device must be
within range of your Treo and you must have previously set up a partnership
with the Bluetooth device. To learn how to set up and connect to Bluetooth
Before You
Begin
Here are tips for working with a Bluetooth hands-free device:
ⅷ To answer a call from a Bluetooth hands-free device, press the button on the hands-free
device when the phone rings. (If you answer a call from your Treo, the call audio stays on
your Treo, unless you transfer the call to your hands-free device.)
ⅷ To make a call using a Bluetooth hands-free device, enter the number on your Treo and
then press Phone/Talk
ⅷ To transfer a call from the handset to a Bluetooth hands-free device during a call, press
Menu (right softkey) and select Connect Bluetooth. (To transfer the call back to the
handset, press Menu [right softkey] and select Cancel Bluetooth.)
.
ⅷ To transfer a call from a wired headset to a Bluetooth hands-free device, unplug the wired
headset and press the button on the Bluetooth hands-free device.
ⅷ If you have more than one compatible Bluetooth hands-free device, the one you
connected to your Treo last becomes the active device.
98
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Customizing Phone Settings
Turn on your phone to access your phone settings. See “Turning Your
Before You
Begin
Selecting Ringtones and Vibrate Settings
You can set various tones for various types of incoming phone calls and notifications.
You can download MP3, MIDI, QCELP, WAV, and WMA ringtones directly to
your Treo (see “Downloading Files and Images From a Web Page” on
email them to your device.
Did you know?
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Sounds & Notifications
.
3. Select the Notifications tab.
4. Select the Event list, and then select which type of call or
notification you want to set the ringtone for:
Ⅲ Phone: Known Caller: The ringtone for an incoming
call from someone in your contact list or speed-dial list.
(The caller’s name appears on the screen when you
receive the call.)
Ⅲ Phone: Missed call: The notification tone for a call you
did not answer.
Ⅲ Phone: Roaming: The ringtone for a call that comes in when you’re outside the
Sprint National Network.
Ⅲ Phone: Unknown Caller: The ringtone for an incoming call from someone who is
not in your contact list or speed-dial list.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
99
Ⅲ Phone: Voice mail: The notification tone for a new voicemail.
For the Missed call and Voice mail options, you can select sound and
display options instead of ring type and ringtone options.
Tip
5. Select the Ring type list, and then select the ring style for the selected type of call.
6. Select the Ring tone list, and then select the sound for the selected type of call.
7. (Optional) Select Play
to preview the sound.
8. Check the Vibrate when… boxes to turn the vibrate feature on or off based on the
Ringer switch setting.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to select ringtones for other types of calls.
10. Press OK
.
To record, preview, delete, and send sounds on your Treo, select the
Manage tab. To record a sound, press Menu (right softkey) and select New
Sound. To play a sound, select it. To delete a sound, highlight it and press
Backspace. To send a sound, highlight it, press Menu (right softkey), and
select Send Sound.
Tip
You can also select tones for events other than phone calls. For example,
select a tone to let you know when a new email message arrives, or when
your Treo detects a wireless network.
Did you know?
Adjusting Volume Settings
ⅷ
Call volume: While a call is in progress, press the Volume button (on the side of your Treo)
to adjust the call volume.
ⅷ
Music/Video volume: While playing music or a video, press the Volume button to adjust
the music/video volume.
100
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
ⅷ
Ringer volume: When a call is not in progress and you are not playing music or a video,
press the Volume button to adjust the ringer volume.
You can also set sounds for messaging notifications and calendar
reminders. See “Selecting Sounds & Notifications” on page 320.
Did you know?
Assigning a Picture and Ringtone ID to a Contact
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Contacts.
3. Highlight the contact that you want to give a picture caller ID.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
5. Select Picture.
6. Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this contact entry, or select an existing
picture for this contact entry.
7. Scroll down to the Ring tone field and then select a tone for this contact entry.
Selecting Your Call Settings
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. On the Phone tab, set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Dialpad: Set the style for the Dialpad tones (DTMF)
when making calls.
Ⅲ Short tones: Set the tones to sound briefly as you
dial.
Ⅲ Long tones: Set the tones to continue to sound
until you release the key.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
101
Ⅲ After calls from numbers that are not in Contacts, ask if I want to add them: Set
whether you are prompted to add contact entries for numbers that are not already in
your Contacts list.
4. Press OK
to finish.
If you have trouble accessing a voicemail system, try changing the Dialpad
tone setting.
Tip
Setting Your Dialing Preferences
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you can
automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers. You can add a different prefix based
on the length of the phone number.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. On the Dialing tab, set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Dialing from North America: Format phone numbers
using North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX)
and set the International Dialing Prefix to 011. If you
travel outside North America and service is available in
your location, remember to disable this option before
you place phone calls.
Ⅲ Always dial 1 in front of area code: Add a 1 in front of
10-digit phone numbers. This option is available only
when Dialing from North America is enabled.
Ⅲ International Dialing Prefix: Add the specified number in front of international phone
numbers when you dial from outside North America. (When you dial an
international number beginning with + [plus sign], the + is replaced by the number
in this field.)
4. Press OK
.
102
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Setting Your Abbreviated Dialing Preferences
Abbreviated dialing lets you simulate dialing numbers from your office’s phone system, so
that you can dial an extension number rather than the complete number.
For example, if your co-worker’s phone number is 1-555-222-1234, you may need to dial only
the last five digits when you’re using a phone that’s part of your company’s phone system. In
that case, you would dial 21234. If your co-worker’s phone number appears as 21234 in your
contact list or corporate Global Address List (GAL), your Treo can dial that number once you
configure abbreviated dialing settings to complete shortened numbers, so that you don’t need
to modify your office phone list.
For example, if all the phone numbers in your office begin with 1-555-22, followed by a
five-digit extension, set your Treo to automatically enter 1-555-22 as the prefix before any
five-digit number. When you dial your co-worker’s five-digit extension, your device
automatically dials 1-555-22 plus the 5-digit extension. The complete number is
1-555-222-1234.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. Select the Dialing tab, and then select Abbreviated Dialing.
4. Check the box that corresponds to the number of digits you
must dial (4, 5, 6, or 7) when you dial an extension.
5. Enter the prefix you want to add to the abbreviated
numbers.
6. Press OK
.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
103
Selecting Your Data Settings
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. Select the Services tab and then select Data Settings.
4. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ Do not allow a voice call to interrupt my data session:
Set whether you can receive calls during a Sprint
Power VisionSM data session.
Ⅲ Allow connection to the Internet: Set whether an
approval message appears each time you connect to
the Internet.
5. Press OK
to return to Phone Settings.
6. Press OK
to finish.
Selecting Your Privacy Settings
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. Select the Services tab and Location Privacy.
4. Set whether your Treo broadcasts your location at all times,
or only during a 911 call.
5. Press OK
to return to Phone Settings.
6. Press OK
to finish.
For quick access to the Location Privacy setting, tap the Location Privacy
icon on your Today screen. For more information on the Location Privacy
Tip
104
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Selecting Your HAC Settings
Your Treo complies with Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) standards and includes an HAC
setting. If you use a hearing aid that is equipped with a telecoil and the HAC setting is on,
your device sends the audio from your phone calls to the telecoil rather than to the
microphone of your hearing aid. You are likely to hear calls much better because volume is
increased and background noise and feedback are diminished. The HAC setting improves
only the calls you listen to through the earpiece. It does not affect calls heard on the
speakerphone or with a headset. HAC requires extra battery power, so watch your battery
consumption when it's turned on.
Do not turn on the HAC setting unless you use a hearing aid with a telecoil.
Using this setting without a hearing aid or with a hearing aid without a
telecoil may be harmful to your hearing.
Caution
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. Select the Services tab and then select Hearing Aid
Compatibility (HAC).
4. Indicate whether you want HAC set to On or Off.
5. Press OK
to return to Phone Settings.
6. Press OK
to finish.
Controlling Your Roaming Experience
Your device is digital dual-band. This means that you can make and receive calls while on the
Sprint National Network. It also means that you can connect to other digital networks (called
roaming) if Sprint has implemented a roaming agreement with the network provider.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
105
When you roam outside the Sprint National Network, the Roaming
icon appears at the top
of your screen. Additional charges may apply if you use your Treo while roaming. To learn
Feature Availability
ⅷ You can make and receive calls while roaming.
ⅷ You can access voicemail while roaming.
ⅷ Other features that are standard on the Sprint National Network, such as call waiting, and
Sprint Power Vision, may be available depending upon your roaming network.
ⅷ Data services may not be available when you are roaming on partner networks.
Setting Roaming Preferences
Use Roaming Preferences to set specific options for using your phone while roaming. For
example, you can set options to be notified that you are roaming before placing a call or
making a data connection, so that you are aware that you might incur extra charges.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
3. Select the Services tab, and then select Roaming.
4. Select the Network selection list and select the networks
with which you want to allow your phone to make a
connection:
Ⅲ Allow roaming: Set your phone to determine the best
network—either home or roaming—with which to
connect.
Ⅲ Home network only: Set your phone to connect only to
the Nationwide Sprint PCS network.
Ⅲ Roaming networks only: Set your phone to connect to
roaming networks only.
106
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
5. Select the following roaming warning options:
Ⅲ Before outgoing calls: Set an alert to appear, warning
you that you are on a roaming network when you
attempt to dial an outgoing call. (Select Auto, Always, or
Never. Auto displays a warning when you roam outside
the U.S., and Always displays a warning when you
roam outside your home network.)
Ⅲ Before data connections: Prevent data connections
while roaming. (Select Automatic, Always, or Never.
Automatic displays a warning when you attempt to
make a data connection while roaming outside the U.S., and Always displays a
warning when you attempt to make a data connection while roaming outside your
home network. To dismiss the warning and allow data connections, select the Don’t
show this again. Always connect when roaming box. You can then attempt to make a
data connection again. If you want to restore you previous roaming selection, you
must return to this screen and select Automatic or Always again.)
6. Press OK
.
Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status
You can monitor the status of the signal strength and several other items on your Treo, using
icons at the top of your Today screen:
Sprint
Your phone is on and you’re inside the Sprint National Network. If you are
outside a coverage area, No Service or Roaming appears instead. No Service
means that there is no coverage at all, and Roaming means that another
wireless service provider’s network is available. When you turn off your phone,
Phone Off appears.
You missed an incoming call.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
107
You have a voicemail message.
You have a new email message.
You have a new text message.
You have more than one of the preceding conditions.
An error occurred during synchronization.
Your phone is on. The bars display the signal strength. The stronger the signal,
the more bars that appear.
Your phone is on and you are outside a coverage area. To save battery power,
consider turning off your phone.
Your phone is off.
A call is in progress.
A call is on hold.
You are outside a Sprint coverage area and are roaming on another wireless
service provider’s network.
You are outside an area that supports data services, or your phone is off, and
therefore a data connection is not available.
You are in an area that supports mobile broadband (EVDO) data services.
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized) is a wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high-speed data transfer, with average download speeds of
400 to 600Kbps. It is capable of reaching download speeds up to 3.2Mbps
and upload speeds up to 1.8Mbps.
Your phone is on and is connected to a mobile broadband network, but you
are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls.
108
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
Your phone is on, and a mobile broadband data connection is active. You can
still make or answer calls. When you make or answer a call, the data
transmission is automatically interrupted.
You are in an area that supports Sprint 1xRTT data services. The 1xRTT
(single-carrier [1x] radio transmission technology) wireless technology can
provide fast data transfer and Internet access with average speeds of 60 to
80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps.
Your phone is on and is connected to a Sprint 1xRTT network, but you are not
actively transmitting data. You can still make and answer calls.
Your phone is on, and a Sprint 1xRTT data connection is active. When you
make or receive a call, the data transmission is automatically interrupted.
The Wi-Fi feature on your Treo is turned on, but you are not connected to a
Wi-Fi network.
You have a Wi-Fi notification waiting. For example, if Wi-Fi is turned on, and
you are not within range of a preferred network, you can tap this icon to view
available networks.
Your Treo is connected to a Wi-Fi network, and you are actively transmitting
data.
Your Treo is connected to your computer, and you are actively transmitting
data using your computer’s Internet connection instead of a Sprint Power
Vision connection. You can still make and receive calls.
Synchronization is in progress with ActiveSync® technology.
The battery is empty and needs to be charged.
The battery is low.
The battery is being charged.
The device is connected to a power source and the battery is fully charged.
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
109
The battery is fully charged.
Location privacy setting is set to Location On. Your location is available to
the Sprint network and to other applications. Tap the icon to quickly access the
for additional information.
Location privacy setting is set to 911 only. Your location is available to the Sprint
network during emergency calls only. Tap the icon to quickly access the
for additional information.
An Internet Sharing connection is active. To end the connection, tap this icon
and press Disconnect
(left softkey). See “Setting Up an Internet
An Internet Sharing connection is not active. To establish a connection, tap this
icon and press Connect
(left softkey). See “Setting Up an Internet
The Bluetooth icon appears in gray when this feature is off, in blue when this
feature is on, and as white with a blue B when your Treo is connected to
another Bluetooth device. To quickly turn the Bluetooth feature on and off,
select the Bluetooth icon to access the Bluetooth Settings screen.
A call is in progress and the call audio is on a Bluetooth hands-free device that
is connected to your Treo.
You have a reminder. If you do not see the reminder on your Today screen, tap
the icon to open the reminder.
You have an alert from Microsoft. If you do not see the alert on your Today
screen, tap the icon to open the alert.
110
Section 2B: Using the Phone Features
112
Getting Started With Sprint Power Vision
Sprint Power VisionSM provides wireless access to the Internet anywhere on the Sprint National
Network. To sign up for Sprint Power Vision services or to access complete instructions, visit
www.sprint.com. For information on charges associated with features that use a Sprint Vision
connection, refer to your Sprint service plan.
Enabling Sprint Power Vision
1. Make sure that the phone of your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device is turned on, as
2. Press Start
and select Internet Explorer to open the Web browser.
3. Wait until the one-time setup process is complete.
4. Press OK
to close Internet Explorer® Mobile and then reopen to begin browsing the
Web.
To see a connection approval message each time you connect to the
Internet, go to your Today screen, press Menu (right softkey), and select
Preferences > Phone Settings. Select the Services tab, and then select
Data Settings. Uncheck the Allow connection to the Internet box.
Tip
114
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
Accessing Sprint Power Vision
Once your Treo is activated, you are signed in and ready to connect to Sprint Power Vision
services at any time.
Sprint Power Vision Username
Your Sprint Power Vision username is automatically assigned to you. Your username, which
resembles an email address (for example, [email protected]), is used with Sprint Mail
and Messaging services. Your Sprint Power Vision username is simply an additional address
that identifies your Sprint Account. When your Treo is enabled with Sprint Power Vision
services, your username automatically appears on the About screen.
To find your username:
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select About
.
3. Select the Phone tab, and then scroll down to Data user name.
Sprint Power Vision Symbols on Your Screen
When you are connected to Sprint Power Vision services, a data connection icon appears at
for a description of the various data connection icons.
Sprint Power Vision Billing Information
See your service plan or contact Sprint for details on Sprint Power Vision billing.
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
115
Using Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device as a Modem
Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is the feature that converts your Treo into a modem so that
you can access the Internet from your laptop computer anywhere on the Sprint advanced
wireless high-speed data network. You can use this feature to send and receive email, browse
the Internet, and access your company’s network anywhere on the Sprint National Network.
To use this service, you may be required to sign up on a Sprint Phone as
Modem plan details and more information.
Note
Setting Up an Internet Connection With Your Computer
You can set up Internet Connection Sharing in one of two ways:
ⅷ Connect your Treo to your computer using the USB sync cable.
ⅷ If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can set up your Treo
as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology.
While your mobile broadband data connection is active, you can receive
incoming calls and place outgoing calls; however, doing either of these
suspends the data connection until you hang up the call.
Note
Sprint Power Vision services are available on the Sprint National Network;
mobile broadband (EVDO) services work anywhere on the Sprint National
Network, but broadband-like download speeds are available only in areas
covered by the mobile broadband network. For information about mobile
broadband services in your area, contact Sprint.
To set up a USB Internet Sharing connection:
1. Connect your Treo to your computer, using the sync cable. (If you’re prompted to set up
116
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
details, or you can cancel synchronization. The sync software is not required when you
use your device as a modem.)
on page 35) and that one of the data services icons (
or
) appears at the top of
the screen. (If you don’t see either of these icons, then you cannot use your Treo as a
modem.)
and select the Internet Sharing
icon.
You can also open Internet Sharing by pressing Start, selecting Programs,
and then selecting Internet Sharing.
Tip
4. Select the PC Connection list, and then select USB.
5. In the Network Connection list, make sure that Power Vision
is selected.
6. Press Connect
(left softkey). (When your computer
icon appears in
detects the connection, a connection
the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer
screen.)
7. On your computer, open your Web browser to confirm that
you can connect to the Internet.
You now have an Internet connection on your computer via your Treo, and you can do
anything you would do using your usual Internet connection.
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
117
To set up an Internet Sharing connection with Bluetooth® wireless technology:
Create a partnership between your Treo and your computer, and be sure to
check the Make this device discoverable to other devices box. We
recommend that you initiate the partnership from your Treo (see “Setting Up
Before You
Begin
1. On your computer, double-click the icon to open the Bluetooth connections window.
(For instructions, check the documentation included with your computer.)
2. Select the option to view devices within range.
3. You should see an icon representing your Treo. Double-click this icon to make sure that
“Network Access Point” or “Personal Access Networking” or something similar appears
in the list of Bluetooth services associated with your Treo.
Don’t see your Treo icon on the list of services? Check the documentation
included with your computer, or contact your computer manufacturer for
help. Various computer models use various terms for the Bluetooth
connection features.
Tip
4. On your Treo, go to your Today screen and select the Internet Sharing
icon.
You can also open Internet Sharing by pressing Start, selecting Programs,
and then selecting Internet Sharing.
Tip
5. Select the PC Connection list, and then select Bluetooth PAN.
6. Press Connect
(left softkey) and follow the wizard to set up Internet Sharing.
7. On your computer, follow the steps to accept or enable a Bluetooth PAN connection
with your Treo. Check the documentation included with your computer for instructions.
8. On your computer, double-click the Network Access Point icon to establish the Bluetooth
PAN connection.
118
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
9. After you have connected, on your computer, open your Web browser to confirm that
you can connect to the Internet.
You now have an Internet connection on your computer via your Treo, and you can do
anything you would do using your usual Internet connection.
Using Sprint TV
With Sprint Power Vision, you can watch live TV on the go right on your Treo. Accessing your
Sprint TV channels is as easy as using the remote control in your living room. Browse through
the available free channels or subscribe to one of the premium offerings. Wherever you go on
the Sprint National Network, you can get more out of your Sprint TV service.
To access your Sprint TV channels:
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Sprint TV
.
3. Select Sprint TV, Premium Channels, or Sprint TV En Vivo to proceed to the channel
listings.
4. Browse through the available programming and select a clip or channel to view the
program.
The first time you access a channel that requires a subscription, you are
prompted to purchase access. Select Subscribe to purchase access, or
select Preview to see a preview of the selected channel.
Note
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
119
Using Pocket Express
With Sprint Power Vision’s exclusive Pocket Express feature, you can personalize the data
services on your Treo to suit your needs. The Pocket Express feature makes it easier than ever
to retrieve the most popular Web information and categories instantly. Pocket Express uses
the ZIP code you provide to customize the content you receive, so you can get the information
you want, when you want it.
Initializing Your Pocket Express Service
1. Press Start
2. Select Get Pocket Express
3. Select View Terms & Conditions, review the terms for your account, and then press
OK
4. Enter your preferred ZIP code.
5. Press I Agree (left softkey).
6. When the Would you like to add Pocket Express to your Today screen prompt appears,
press Yes (left softkey) or press No (right softkey). (If you press No, you can
and select Programs.
.
.
access Pocket Express from the Programs folder.)
7. Wait for Pocket Express to retrieve information based on your selected location.
Accessing Pocket Express Information
Finding the information you’re looking for with Pocket Express is as easy as navigating a Web
browser on your computer. (The following example illustrates how to access News
information.)
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Pocket Express
.
120
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
If you selected the option to add Pocket Express to your Today screen, you
can also open Pocket Express by selecting the Pocket Express icon on
your Today screen.
Tip
3. Select Breaking News Photos & Opinion. (As you highlight a category name, the
description expands. For example, when highlighted the News category becomes
Breaking News Photos & Opinion.)
4. Depending on which category you select, a menu appears with additional options. (For
this example, you can select from subcategories such as Top News, US News, World
News, Red’s Blog, Today in History, Politics, etc.)
5. Select a subcategory, and then select an article. (The article is then displayed.)
6. Do any of the following to navigate through the content:
Ⅲ Scroll to the bottom of the screen to access options that allow you to go back,
view the full story, email the link, view associated images, or select additional
navigation options.
Ⅲ Use the 5-way to scroll through the article.
Ⅲ Select Back (at the bottom of the screen) to return to the article list.
Ⅲ Select Full to view the full article.
Ⅲ Select Mail to send a link to the article via email.
Ⅲ Select PageOne to return to the category list.
From the main screen, select and explore other categories, such as Weather, Sports, and
Money, and enjoy the feature-rich content. The Showbiz category lets you see which movies
are playing near you, including showtimes; for select theaters, you can even purchase tickets
right from your Treo.
In addition to the standard categories, you can select optional categories for a fee, such as
Maps and TV Guide. Optional categories bring the information you want right to your screen
without doing a traditional Web search. For additional free and fee-based options, check the
Extras page. Check in often to see what’s being offered.
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
121
Updating Pocket Express Information
You can set Pocket Express to update news and information automatically, or you can retrieve
updates manually.
To manually retrieve updates:
ᮣ
From any Pocket Express category page, select Update at the bottom of the screen.
To automatically retrieve updates:
1. From any Pocket Express screen, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Express
Settings.
2. Select the Account list in the upper-left corner, and select Auto-Updates.
3. Set the Frequency and Begin Time.
4. Press Done
(left softkey).
122
Section 3A: Sprint Power VisionSM—The Basics
Getting Started With Email
Just like on your computer, you can choose between email applications to manage your
email. Your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device includes two options for reading and sending
email. (Additional fees may apply for email services.)
ⅷ
Inbox: Check email from your corporate Exchange server, from your POP/IMAP accounts
with your ISP (Internet service provider), and from Internet mail accounts such as AOL or
ⅷ
If you want to, you can set up more than one application to work with separate email
accounts.
You can receive email messages in various formats, including HTML, RTF,
and plain text. If your email provider offers a Web interface, you can also use
Tip
Internet Explorer® Mobile to manage email from your Treo. To learn about
If your email account requires a VPN connection for establishing a secure
connection, your VPN server may require that you install specific VPN
software (sold separately) on your Treo before you can access your email.
Did you know?
124
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
Getting Email and Microsoft® Outlook® Information From Your
Corporate Microsoft® Exchange Server
You can wirelessly synchronize email, contacts, appointments, and other information on your
Treo with Microsoft® Exchange Server.
Microsoft® Direct Push Technology
If you are using Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service
Pack 2, you may be able synchronize email wirelessly and take advantage of the additional
features of Microsoft® Direct Push technology.
Microsoft Direct Push is a two-way wireless delivery method that keeps your Outlook
information always up-to-date and provides more efficient communication between the server
and your device. It includes features such as Global Address List (GAL), Tasks Over The Air
(OTA), and IP-based push updating of Microsoft® Outlook® information (Inbox, Calendar,
Contacts, and Tasks).
For delivery of Outlook email using Direct Push technology, make sure that your company
uses Microsoft® Exchange Server 2007 or Microsoft® Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to
Service Pack 2, and ask your system administrator if synchronization features are enabled.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
125
Setting Up an Exchange Server Account
To wirelessly synchronize your Treo with an Exchange server, you must
activate Sprint Power Vision data services. See “Enabling Sprint Power
Before You
Begin
Work with your system administrator to gather the following information:
•
•
•
Exchange server address and domain name.
Are the Exchange server settings detectable?
Security connection: Does your server use an encrypted (SSL)
connection?
•
•
Your username and password.
Security measure: Is it OK to store your corporate email password on
your Treo?
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Add Server Source. (If you see Configure
Server in the menu instead of Add Server Source, then your Exchange server account is
already set up, and you do not need to complete the rest of the setup steps.)
4. Enter the email address that you want to set up.
5. Do either of the following, and then press Next
(right
softkey).
Ⅲ If the Exchange server is detectable, keep the check in
the Attempt to detect Exchange Server Settings
automatically box.
Ⅲ If the Exchange server is not detectable, uncheck the
Attempt to detect Exchange Server Settings
automatically box.
126
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
6. Enter the Server address, check the This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection
box if your server uses an encrypted connection; then press Next (right softkey).
If your Treo was able to detect the Exchange server settings, this screen
does not appear.
Note
7. Enter the username and password you use to access your corporate mail server, and
enter the Exchange server domain.
The Exchange Server settings are case-sensitive. Be sure to enter
uppercase and lowercase letters properly. Be especially careful when
entering the password, because it does not appear on the screen as you
Tip
8. Do either of the following and then press Next
(right softkey):
Ⅲ If you want to enter your password each time you access this account, uncheck the
Save password box.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
127
Ⅲ If you want your password entered automatically and your system administrator said
it is OK to store your password on your Treo, keep the check in the Save password
box.
For increased security, you may need to enter your password each time you
access your email.
Tip
9. Check the boxes for the types of information you want to sync with the Exchange server.
10. (Optional) Highlight an item and select Settings to change the synchronization settings
for that type of information. (Press OK
to return to the Edit Server Settings screen.)
If you want to download more than the email message header, select
E-mail and increase the KB setting. If you don’t increase this setting, you
Note
can manually download the rest of the message at your convenience.
Not all information types have settings.
128
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
11. (Optional) Press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Advanced to set the rules for fixing sync conflicts, and then
press Save
(right softkey).
12. Press Finish
(left softkey). (Synchronization with your
Exchange server begins automatically. A status bar
appears onscreen indicating sync progress.)
You can set a schedule for synchronization to take place anytime
information is updated on either your Treo or the server, or at
specific intervals. See the next section for instructions on setting
your sync schedule.
Setting a Sync Schedule With an Exchange Server
Set up an Exchange Server email account. See “Setting Up an Exchange
Before You
Begin
Follow these steps to set your sync schedule:
1. Press Start and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Schedule.
4. Set your schedule for peak and off-peak times. (To
conserve power, we recommend that you change your
settings to synchronize every 30 or 60 minutes instead of
as items arrive.)
5. Set your roaming preference. (If roaming charges are not a
concern, select Use above settings when roaming.)
6. Press OK
.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
129
Setting Up an IMAP or POP Email Account
You can use the Inbox application (Microsoft Outlook Mobile) to send and receive email
messages. To use Inbox, you must have an email account with an Internet service provider
(ISP), an email account that you access using a VPN server connection (such as a work
account), or any other IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) or POP (Post Office Protocol)
email account.
If you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each email
account.
Note
Setting Up Inbox to Work With Common Providers
Use the following steps if you have a common email provider such as AOL, EarthLink, Yahoo!
Mail Plus, or Gmail. If you are setting up the Inbox application to work with your corporate
email account, or if you have a less-common email provider, see “Setting Up Inbox to Work
Ask your email provider or system administrator for your account username
and password if you don’t know them.
Before You
Begin
2. Press Inbox
.
3. Select Setup E-mail.
4. Enter the email address and password for the email
account that you want to set up.
5. If you want to enter your password each time you access
this account, uncheck the Save password box. (If you want
your password entered automatically, check this box.)
130
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
6. Press Next
(right softkey).
7. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ If the setup process finds your account settings, press
Next
(right softkey).
Ⅲ If the setup process does not find your account
settings, see “Setting Up Inbox to Work With Other
Providers” on page 132 and continue with step 8 of
that procedure.
8. Enter your name and a name that identifies this account,
such as “AOL,” and then press Next
(right softkey). (The account name appears
on the Today screen along with the number of unread messages for this account.)
9. (Optional) Select either of the following:
Ⅲ Automatic Send/Receive: Change the time interval for automatically downloading
email, from every five minutes to once a day. If you do not want to automatically
download messages, select Manually.
Ⅲ Review all download settings: Select this link to change download settings; see
10. Press Finish
(right softkey).
11. If prompted, select OK to download messages for this account now.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
131
On the Accounts tab in Inbox Options, an asterisk appears next to the
account that was active when you opened Inbox Options.
Did you know?
Setting Up Inbox to Work With Other Providers
You can set up an account in the Inbox application to send and receive email messages,
using an email account that you have with an Internet service provider (ISP), an email account
that you access using a VPN server connection (such as a work account; see “Connecting to
a VPN” on page 341), or any other IMAP or POP email account.
Work with your email provider or system administrator to gather the
following information: account type (POP3 or IMAP), mail server name for
receiving mail, your username and password, and any special security
requirements, including whether it is OK to store your password on your
Treo.
Before You
Begin
2. Press Inbox
.
3. Select Setup E-mail.
4. Enter the email address and password for the email
account that you want to set up.
5. If you want to enter your password each time you access
this account, uncheck the Save password box. (If you want
your password entered automatically, check this box.)
6. Press Next
7. Uncheck the Try to get e-mail settings automatically from the
Internet box, and then press Next (right softkey).
(right softkey).
132
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
8. Select one of the following as your email provider, and then
press Next (right softkey):
Ⅲ Internet e-mail: Select this option if you access email
from an Internet provider’s domain name, such as
aol.com.
Ⅲ Exchange server: Select this option if you access email
from a corporate email account using an Exchange
server, and then go to “Setting Up an Exchange Server
Account” on page 126 for the remaining setup steps.
Ⅲ Custom domain: Select this option if you access email
from your own domain name, such as johndoedomain.com.
You can set up multiple email accounts, but you can set up only one
Exchange server account. If you have already set up an Exchange server
account, this option does not appear.
Note
9. If you selected Custom domain in the previous step, enter your custom domain name,
and then press Next (right softkey).
10. Enter your name and a name that identifies this account,
and then press Next (right softkey). (For example, if
this is your work email account, you can name the account
“Work” or your company’s name. The account display
name appears on the Today screen along with the number
of unread messages for this account.).
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
133
11. Enter your incoming mail server address, select your
account type, and then press Next (right softkey).
12. Enter your account username and password.
13. If you want your password entered automatically, check the
Save password box; if you want to enter your password
each time you access this account, do not check this box.
(For a corporate email account, ask your system
administrator if it is OK to store your corporate email
password on your Treo. If it is not OK, don’t check the Save
password box.)
14. Press Next
(right softkey).
15. Enter the following outgoing mail settings:
Ⅲ Outgoing (SMTP) mail server: Enter the server name.
Ⅲ Outgoing server requires authentication: Check the box
if your outgoing mail server requires authentication.
Ⅲ Use the same user name and password for sending
e-mail: Check the box if the server requires you to use
your account username and password when sending
email.
16. (Optional) Select the Advanced Server Settings link, select
the following settings, and then press Done
(left softkey):
Ⅲ Require SSL for Incoming e-mail: Check the box if your
account requires SSL for incoming messages.
Ⅲ Require SSL for Outgoing e-mail: Check the box if your
account requires SSL for outgoing messages.
Ⅲ Network connection: Select the type of connection to
use for sending and receiving email.
134
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
17. On the Outgoing (SMTP) mail server screen, press Next
(right softkey).
18. (Optional) Set any of the following:
Ⅲ Automatic Send/Receive: Change the time interval for
automatically sending and downloading email, from
every five minutes to once a day. If you do not want to
automatically download messages, select Manually.
Ⅲ Review all download settings: Select this link to
change download settings; see “Changing Email
19. Press Finish
(right softkey). If prompted, select OK to
download messages for this account now.
To delete an email account, press OK to close the Inbox application if it is
open. Press Inbox, highlight the account you want to delete, press Menu
(right softkey), and then select Delete. (To delete an Outlook Email account,
Tip
use the ActiveSync® application, not the Inbox application.) To edit an
account—for example, if you need to change the name of the outgoing mail
server—press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Options, select the
account, and press Next (right softkey) to reach the screens where you
want to change the settings.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
135
Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Selecting Which Email Account to Use
If you set up more than one email account on your Treo (see “Getting Started With Email” on
page 124), you can choose one of two ways to select the account that you want to use to view
or send messages:
ⅷ By default, when you open the Inbox application, a list of all your email accounts appears.
Select the account you want.
application. Press Left or Right to cycle through your accounts until the name of the
account you want appears in the title bar.
You can also to switch to a different account after you finish working in the
first account you selected. From the message list, press Left or Right.
Tip
Creating and Sending an Email Message
You can receive plain text and HTML messages.
1. Press Inbox
2. Select the account you want to use to send a message.
3. Press Menu (right softkey) and select New.
.
4. Do one of the following to address the message:
Ⅲ If the recipient’s name and email address are in your Contacts list, enter the first few
letters of the recipient’s first or last name, or the recipient’s first and last initials
separated by a space, and then select the recipient’s name.
Ⅲ If the recipient’s name is in an online address book, you can find the name and add
136
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
Ⅲ If the recipient’s name and email address are not in your Contacts list, enter the full
email address.
To address a message to multiple recipients, separate the addresses by
pressing Option + K to enter a semicolon (;). To enter an underscore (_ ) in
an address, press Alt and select the underscore symbol from the list.
Tip
5. Select Subject and enter a title for the message.
6. Press Down to go to the body of the message.
7. Enter your message, or press Menu (right softkey),
select My Text, and then select a predefined phrase you
want to insert.
8. (Optional) Press Menu
(right softkey) and do any of
the following:
Ⅲ
Select Insert, select the type of item you want to attach,
and then select the file or record a voice note.
Ⅲ Select Spell Check.
Ⅲ Select Message Options, select the Priority list, select a setting for the message, and
then press OK
.
9. Press Send
(left softkey).
To save storage space on your Treo, turn off the option to save sent
messages in the Sent folder. In the Inbox application, press Menu (right
softkey) and select Tools > Options. Select the Message tab, and then
uncheck the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder box.
Tip
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
137
Receiving Email Messages
How you receive email messages depends on the type of account you are using and how
you synchronize:
ⅷ
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®: New email messages are sent to your Treo when they
appear on the server, according to the schedule you set up, or when you manually initiate
If you sync email with Microsoft® Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can
Tip
synchronize messages in subfolders you create. In the Inbox application,
press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > Manage Folders. Folders
containing subfolders display a plus sign (+). Select the + to view the
subfolders. Check the box to the left of any subfolder you want to sync.
If you synchronize email with Microsoft® Exchange Server 2007, and you
receive a message containing a link to a document on SharePoint or an
Did you know?
internal file server, you can view the document by selecting the link.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Desktop synchronization software: If you synchronize your Treo with your computer,
messages in Microsoft Outlook on your computer are transferred to your Treo when you
connect your computer and your device (see “Synchronizing With a USB Connection” on
All other POP or IMAP accounts: These include ISP accounts and accounts you access
using a VPN server connection (typically a work account; see “Connecting to a VPN” on
page 341). Message retrieval depends on the option you chose from the Automatic
Send/Receive list during account setup (see “Setting Up Inbox to Work With Common
as follows:
Ⅲ If you chose a time interval: Your Treo automatically checks for and downloads new
messages according to that interval.
138
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
Ⅲ If you chose Manually: Follow these steps to send and receive messages:
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Select the account for which you want to receive email messages.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Send/Receive to synchronize your Treo with
your email server.
Partially downloaded messages appear in the message list with a partial
Tip
envelope icon to the left of the subject. To view the full message, either
press Menu (right softkey) and select Download Message, or open the
message and select Get the rest of this message.
You can view messages sent as HTML with the HTML formatting intact.
Did you know?
Receiving Attachments
You can receive and open attachments in a number of different formats, including Word®,
Excel®, OneNote®, PowerPoint®, ZIP, and PDF. To receive and open attachments, do the
following:
1. Highlight the attachment name below the subject to mark it for download.
2. Synchronize the email account that contains the message as described in the previous
sections.
3. Select the attachment name (below the subject) to open the attachment.
To store attachments on an expansion card, insert the card into the
expansion card slot on your Treo, press Menu (right softkey), and select
Tools > Options. Select Storage and check the When available, use this
storage card to store attachments box.
Tip
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
139
Downloading Attachments Automatically
If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your computer and want to download attachments
automatically, do the following:
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
4. Select E-mail and then select Settings.
5. Check the Include file attachments box.
6. (Optional) To automatically download attachments up to a certain size only, check the
Only if smaller than box and enter the maximum attachment size.
7. Press OK
.
To automatically download attachments from an IMAP4 email account (typically an ISP
account) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If you see the account list, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
Ⅲ If you see the message list for a specific account, press Menu
(right softkey)
and select Tools > Options.
3. On the Accounts tab, select the IMAP4 account name.
4. Select Download Size Settings.
5. Select the Message download limit list and select Entire message.
6. Select the Download attachments list and then select either All attachments or one of the
size limit options.
7. Press Done
(left softkey) twice, and then press OK
.
140
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
Embedded images and objects cannot be received as attachments, unless
you have an IMAP4 email account with TNEF disabled. Note that TNEF must
be enabled in order for you to receive meeting requests.
Did you know?
Working With Email Messages
Adding a Contact From an Email Message
You can add a contact name or email address to your Contacts list directly from the To, cc, or
bcc field of an email message. You can select the name or address from either an outgoing
or an incoming message, and you can either create a new contact or add the information to
an existing contact.
1. In an open message, highlight the name or address of the contact you want to add.
2. Press Center
.
3. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey) and select New
Contact to create a new contact entry for this name or
address.
Ⅲ Select an existing contact to add the name or address
to the selected entry.
4. Enter or edit the contact information.
5. Press Save
(left softkey).
Adding an Online Address Book
Many email servers can verify names with an online address book, also called a directory
service or a Global Address List (GAL). When you set up an Exchange Server account on
your Treo, you automatically set up access to the Global Address List for that Exchange
server. After you sync with the Exchange server for the first time, the Inbox application checks
your contact list and then the directory service to verify names that you enter in the To, Cc,
and Bcc fields.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
141
If your organization provides an online address book but does not use Exchange Server,
follow the steps in this section to enable Inbox to verify the names that you enter in the To, Cc,
and Bcc fields.
Ask your system administrator for the name of the directory service and the
server, and whether authentication is required for accessing an online
address book.
Before You
Begin
1. In the message list, press Menu
2. Select the Address tab.
3. Select Add.
(right softkey) and select Tools > Options.
4. Enter the name of the Directory service.
5. Enter the Server name.
6. If your server requires authentication, check the box and enter your username and
password.
7. (Optional) Check the Check name against this server box to enable this directory service.
8. Press OK
.
To delete a directory service, highlight it, press and hold Center on the
5-way, and select Delete.
Tip
Using an Online Address Book
You can access contact information, such as an email address or phone number, from your
organization’s online address book or Global Address List (GAL). To access a GAL, make
sure you are accessing either Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or Microsoft Exchange Server
2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2.
Add access to an online address book to your Treo (see “Adding an Online
Before You
Begin
142
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
1. In a new message, select To.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Add Recipient.
(right softkey) and select Company Directory.
3. Press Menu
4. Enter the contact name (in part or in full) as it appears in the directory, and then press
Find (left softkey). (You must spell the contact name correctly.)
If your organization’s GAL uses abbreviated extension numbers, you can set your Treo to
on page 103 for more information.
You can use the Global Address List to find a contact. In Contacts, press
Menu (right softkey), and then select Company Directory. When sending a
meeting request, select Attendees, select Add Required Attendee or Add
Optional Attendee, and then press Menu (right softkey), and select
Company Directory.
Did you know?
When you sync your Microsoft Outlook email account with your computer
(as opposed to wireless synchronization with an Exchange server), disable
your online address books to avoid errors. Press Menu (right softkey) and
select Tools > Options. Select Address, select each online address book,
and then uncheck the Check name against this server box. Be sure to turn
this option back on if you synchronize other email accounts.
Tip
Finding Messages
You can find messages containing a specific word or phrase. The find feature searches
names, email addresses, and subject lines.
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Select the account you want.
3. Begin typing the word or phrase you want to find. (The list changes to show only those
messages containing the letters you enter, and those letters are highlighted.)
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
143
4. Continue entering letters to narrow the list until the message you want appears.
To clear the search filter and display all messages for this account, press
Backspace.
Tip
Using Links in Messages
When you receive a text or email message that contains a telephone number, email address,
or URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go to the Web page
immediately. Your Treo automatically opens the appropriate application from the link.
1. Select a message in the list.
2. Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text).
Replying to a Message
1. Open the message to which you want to reply.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ To reply to only the sender of the message, press Reply
(left softkey).
Ⅲ To reply to all the recipients of the message, press Menu
(right softkey) and
select Reply > Reply All.
3. Enter any text you want to add.
4. (Optional) Select Edit sender’s message to edit the original sender’s message text that
you include in your reply.
5. Press Send
(left softkey).
If you reply to a message sent as HTML, the reply is sent in HTML also.
Did you know?
144
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
Forwarding a Message
1. Open the message you want to forward.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Reply > Forward.
3. Address the message and enter any text you want to add.
4. Press Send
(left softkey).
Deleting Messages
You can delete a message you are reading, or you can delete one or more messages from
the message list.
To delete a message you are reading:
ᮣ
Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete.
To delete messages from the message list:
1. Highlight the message(s) you want to delete. (To highlight multiple messages, tap and
drag the stylus across the messages in the list.)
2. Press Delete
(left softkey).
3. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Using Inbox Shortcuts
You can perform common email tasks for messages you’ve received by pressing and holding
certain keys on the keyboard. Either highlight a message on the message list or open a
message from the list, and then press and hold any of the following:
Press and
hold...
To...
H
A
R
View all email shortcuts.
Reply to the sender of a message and to all other recipients.
Reply to the sender only.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
145
Press and
hold...
To...
K
F
Mark a message as read or unread.
Flag a message as high priority.
Move a message between folders.
Forward a message.
M
O
D
L
Delete a message.
Fully download a partially downloaded message.
S
Synchronize your Treo with the server to receive and send new
messages.
Adding a Signature to Your Messages
You can use a different signature with each email account.
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If you see the account list, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
Ⅲ If you see the message list for a specific account, press Menu
(right softkey)
and select Tools > Options.
3. On the Accounts tab, select Signatures.
4. Select the account for which you want to create a signature.
146
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
5. Check the Use signature with this account box to add this
signature to new messages you create with this account.
6. (Optional) Check the Use when replying and forwarding box
to add this signature to messages you reply to and forward
with this account.
7. Highlight the text in the signature field at the bottom of the
screen, and enter the signature text you want to use.
8. Press OK
.
Customizing Your Inbox Settings
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If you see the account list, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
Ⅲ If you see the message list for a specific account, press Menu
(right softkey)
and select Tools > Options.
3. On the Accounts tab, set either of the following options:
Ⅲ Security: Set whether you receive a warning message
before you navigate to a URL or a file link that is not on
your Treo.
Ⅲ Display account picker when opening Inbox: Set
whether a list of your email accounts appears when
you open the Inbox application, allowing you to select
the one you want to use. (If the box is unchecked, the
Inbox application opens to the last account you used.)
If the Display account picker when opening Inbox box is unchecked, open
the Inbox application and then repeatedly press Inbox or press Left or Right
on the 5-way to cycle through your accounts.
Tip
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
147
4. Select the Message tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ When replying to e-mail, include body: Set whether the
body of a message you received appears in your
response to that message.
Ⅲ Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder: Set whether
messages you send are stored in the Sent folder.
Ⅲ Warn when deleting messages in the message list: Set
whether a confirmation message appears when you
delete messages from the message list.
Ⅲ After deleting or moving a message: Set what you
want to see after you delete or move an email message
you are reading: the account Inbox or the next message.
5. Select the Address tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ In Contacts, get e-mail addresses from: Set whether
you want to check Contacts in addition to any directory
services for email addresses.
Ⅲ Check names using these address books: Set which
directory services you want to check for email
addresses.
Ⅲ Add: Add directory services to the list of online address
books.
148
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
6. Select the Storage tab and set either of the following options:
Ⅲ When available, use this storage card to store
attachments: Set whether you want to automatically
store email attachments on an expansion card. (You
must have a card inserted into the expansion card slot
on your Treo to select this option.)
Ⅲ Empty deleted items: Select Immediately to have the
Deleted folder emptied anytime you delete a message.
Select On connect/disconnect to have the folder
emptied anytime you open or quit the Inbox
application. (Select Manually to manually empty the
Deleted folder.)
If you choose to manually empty the Deleted folder, you delete messages
from this folder in the same way that you delete any other messages (see
Tip
7. Press OK
.
Changing Email Download Settings
You can customize the download options for each email account.
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If you see the account list, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
Ⅲ If you see the message list for a specific account, press Menu
(right softkey)
and select Tools > Options.
3. Select the email account you want.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
149
4. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If you see the Contents list, select Send/Receive
Schedule.
Ⅲ If you see the Enter Email Address screen, press Next
(right softkey) until you see the screen to the right.
5. Select either of the following:
Ⅲ Automatic Send/Receive: Set the time interval for
automatically downloading email, from every five
minutes to once a day. (If you do not want to
automatically download messages, select Manually.)
Ⅲ Download messages: Set the number of days’ worth of email to be retrieved for
each automatic or manual retrieval.
To save memory, limit the number of emails you download to your Treo by
selecting a long interval for the Automatic Send/Receive setting or a short
interval for the Downloaded messages setting.
Tip
6. Select Advanced Settings and then select any of the following:
Ⅲ Send/receive when I click Send: Set whether you can manually send and receive
messages, in addition to automatically downloading them.
Ⅲ Use automatic send/receive schedule when roaming:
Set whether automatic downloading takes place when
you are roaming. (This may result in higher connection
charges than downloading while in your home
network.)
Ⅲ When deleting messages: Set whether messages
should be deleted from the mail server when you
delete them on your Treo, or whether messages you
delete on your device should remain on the server.
150
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
7. Press Done
(left softkey).
8. Press Next
(right softkey).
9. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ Message format: Set the format for sending and
receiving messages. (If you select HTML, messages
sent to you as HTML are received with their formatting
intact. If you select Plain Text, all messages are received
as plain text.)
Ⅲ Message download limit: Set the size of an incoming
message that is automatically downloaded. For any
message that exceeds this size, you must manually
download the rest of the message. (Selecting a higher
limit means more of your messages are fully
downloaded, but message retrieval might take longer. You can also choose to
download message headers only, regardless of size.)
Ⅲ Download attachments: Set whether attachments are automatically downloaded
with messages.
10. Press Finish
(right softkey).
Messages sent to you as plain text are always received as plain text, even if
you select HTML.
Did you know?
Setting Email Delivery Preferences
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Select the email account you want.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delivery Preferences.
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
151
4. On the Auto Sync tab, set any of the following:
Ⅲ Connect and check for messages every: Set how frequently the Inbox application
checks for new email messages.
Ⅲ Connection: Set which connection settings to use when checking for email, such
as Internet or Work.
5. Select the Filters tab and set any of the following:
Ⅲ Only display messages from the last [ ] day(s): Set the number of days’ worth of
email to be retrieved for each automatic or manual retrieval.
Ⅲ Get…: Set whether to download the full message or only the message header.
Ⅲ Include [ ] KB of message body: Set the size of an incoming message that is
automatically downloaded. For any message that exceeds this size, you must
manually download the rest of the message. (Setting a higher limit means that more
of your messages are fully downloaded, but message retrieval might take longer.
You can also choose to download message headers only, regardless of size.)
Ⅲ When getting full copy, get attachments: Set whether attachments are automatically
downloaded with the message text.
Ⅲ Only if smaller than: Limit the size of attachments that are downloaded
automatically.
6. Press OK
.
Working With Meeting Invitations
You can receive meeting invitations on your Treo in the same way that you receive email
messages. Here are the key features of meeting invitations:
ⅷ Meeting invitations appear on your Treo in the Inbox application, not in Calendar.
ⅷ From within the Inbox application, you can accept, decline, or tentatively accept a meeting
invitation.
ⅷ If you accept an invitation, the meeting shows up as an appointment in Calendar.
152
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
ⅷ You can reply to and forward meeting invitations in the same way as email messages.
You can create meeting invitations on your Treo; see “Sending a Meeting
Note
1. Press Inbox
.
2. Select the account you want.
3. Select a meeting invitation to open it. (Meeting invitations appear with this icon:
4. Do either of the following:
.)
Ⅲ To accept the invitation, press Accept
(left softkey), select whether to edit
(include comments with) your response, and then select OK.
Ⅲ To decline or tentatively accept the invitation, press Menu
(right softkey) and
select Decline or Tentative.
If you receive an updated meeting invitation, you can again choose to
accept, decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a meeting cancellation,
you can press Remove (left softkey) to delete the meeting from your
calendar.
Tip
Sending Email Messages From Within Another Application
You can send certain files as attachments from within the application where the file is created
or stored. For example, if you take a picture with the built-in camera, you can select an option
to send the picture as an attachment to an email message. You can also use this feature with
videos and sound files. For details, see the chapter on the specific application.
You can send files such as Microsoft Office documents (Word, PowerPoint,
Excel, and OneNote), PDF documents, pictures, videos, and ringtones as
attachments to email messages (see “Creating and Sending an Email
Did you know?
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
153
154
Section 3B: Using the Email Features
About Messaging
Your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device offers a few ways for you to send and receive
messages:
SMS: Enables you to use the Messaging application to exchange brief text messages with
other wireless devices and email addresses that support this form of messaging.
IM: Enables you to exchange instant messages with friends and colleagues who use
Microsoft® Windows LiveTM.
To exchange instant messages with people who use other IM services, such
as Yahoo! and AOL, press Start, select Programs, and then select Instant
Messaging. Select Yes to download the application, and then press Install
(left softkey), to complete the installation. When the installation is complete,
press Start, select Programs, and then select Instant Messaging to sign in
to your IM account(s).
Tip
Before you use your Treo to send or receive messages, consult Sprint for pricing and
availability of text and instant messaging, as well as for data services.
Make sure your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area before
you try to send or receive messages.
Before You
Begin
This chapter describes the various messaging options and walks you through setting them
up, so that you can use your Treo to send and receive messages.
156
Section 3C: Using Messaging
Sending and Receiving Messages
Creating and Sending a Text Message
Each text message can hold up to 160 characters. To save time, you can select from
predefined My Text phrases, such as “Call me” or “On my way.” You can add your own
My Text phrases, and if you prefer, you can enter the full message text too.
Messaging
(left softkey).
You can also open the Messaging application by pressing and holding
Option + Inbox, or by pressing Start, selecting Programs, and then
selecting the Messaging icon.
Tip
2. Press New
(left softkey).
3. Do one of the following to address the message:
Ⅲ If the recipient’s name and wireless number are in your
Contacts list, type the first few letters of the first or last
name, or simply enter the first initial, followed by a
space and then the last initial, to find a name. (You can
also enter the first few numbers of a contact’s wireless
phone number.)
Ⅲ Press Center
to view a list of recently used
addresses, and select the recipient from the list.
(Select Add Recipient to add a recipient from your
Contacts list.)
Ⅲ If the recipient’s name and wireless number are not in your Contacts list, enter the
full wireless number (including area code) or email address.
Section 3C: Using Messaging
157
If you enter the recipient’s name, make sure you select a phone number that
accepts text messages.
Tip
You can also address a message to a name that is in an online address
To address a message to multiple recipients, separate the addresses with a
semicolon (;). If you address a single text message to three people, you are
billed for three messages.
4. Enter your message, or select
, and then select a predefined phrase you want
to insert.
5. (Optional) Select
and then select an emoticon to add to your message.
(left softkey).
6. Press Send
You can send and receive text messages even while you are on a phone
call. This is easiest when using a headset or the speakerphone.
Did you know?
Tip
Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. Invalid characters are
automatically replaced by the Messaging application.
Setting Message Options
You can set options for individual text messages that you send.
You can set general preferences that apply to all incoming and outgoing
Did you know?
set options for an individual message, those options override your general
preferences for that message only.
1. On the message compose screen, press Menu
(right softkey).
2. Select Message Options.
158
Section 3C: Using Messaging
3. Set the following options:
Ⅲ Message Priority: Set this message as normal or
urgent.
Ⅲ Add Call Back number: Enter a number where the
recipient can call you back.
4. Press OK
.
Receiving Text Messages
When your phone is on and you are in a wireless coverage area, you automatically receive
new text messages.
Message notifications include the message text unless you have turned on
privacy mode is on, the notification states only the type of incoming
message.
Did you know?
The new message notification may include the following options:
ⅷ
View: Open a text message so you can view its full contents.
ⅷ
Dismiss: Close the notification and put the message into your
Inbox.
If you have multiple messages, the notification includes the
number of messages.
The Messaging status field on the Today screen also shows you the
number of unread messages.
Tip
Section 3C: Using Messaging
159
Viewing a Message
There are several ways to view a text message.
1. Do one of the following to open a message:
Ⅲ From a notification, select View.
Ⅲ From the Today screen, select the Messaging status field, and then select the
message you want to view.
Ⅲ From the Today screen, press Messaging
(left softkey) and then select the
message you want to view.
Ⅲ Press Start
, select Programs, select Messaging , and then select the
message you want to view.
2. (Optional) After you open the message, press Menu
(right softkey) and select an
item to reply to the sender, reply to everyone sent the message, forward the message,
call the sender, or add the sender’s information to Contacts.
3. Press OK
.
Using Messaging to Chat
When you exchange more than one message with a single
contact, the messages you exchange with that person are
grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session
from your message list, the upper part of the screen displays all
the messages you’ve exchanged with this contact, and the lower
part provides a text entry area.
1. From your Messaging Inbox folder, do one of the following:
Ⅲ Start a new chat: Select a message and reply to it.
Ⅲ Continue an existing chat: Select a message with the
chat
2. Enter your message.
3. Press Send (left softkey).
icon.
160
Section 3C: Using Messaging
Using Links in Messages
When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL,
you can dial the number, send an email message, or go to the Web page immediately. Your
Treo automatically opens the appropriate application from the link.
1. Open a message in the Inbox or another folder.
2. Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text).
Managing Your Messages
Message Status Icons
The status icons that appear next to each message in the Inbox and Outbox indicate
the following:
An unread text message.
A read text message.
Multiple messages exchanged with a single recipient (chat).
An urgent message. (This icon appears below the message size
on the right side of the screen.)
Unread messages appear in bold. Messages you’ve read appear in
plain text.
Tip
Section 3C: Using Messaging
161
Sorting Your Messages
You can arrange the messages in any folder by date or sender.
1. Go to the Inbox or other folder you want to arrange.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Sort.
3. Select By Date or By Name.
Deleting a Single Message
1. Go to the Inbox or other folder containing the message you want to delete.
2. Highlight the message.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete.
4. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Deleting Multiple Messages
1. Go to the Inbox or other folder containing the messages
you want to delete.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Purge.
3. Select the age of messages to be deleted, or select Delete
all messages.
4. Select Purge
(left softkey).
162
Section 3C: Using Messaging
Customizing Your Messaging Settings
Messaging
(left softkey).
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
3. On the Messages tab, set the following options:
Ⅲ Confirm message deletions: Set whether you see deletion confirmation messages.
Ⅲ Signature: Add a signature to outgoing messages. Select the button; then, on the
Signature screen, check the Use signature with new messages box, enter your
signature text, and press OK
.
4. Select the Chat tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Create chats from messages: Set the conditions under which a chat session starts.
Ⅲ Show time stamps of each message: Set whether chat session items display a date
and time indicator.
5. Select the Notification tab and set whether notifications for a single incoming message
display the text of the message or only the message type.
6. Press OK
.
Section 3C: Using Messaging
163
Options you select for an individual message (see “Setting Message
Options” on page 158) override the options you set for all messages.
Did you know?
Using Windows LiveTM
Windows Live is a set of services that combines online search features, email, and instant
messaging:
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Live Search for Windows Mobile®: A search application that enables you to find local
information such as movie times and traffic conditions. You can also configure this
application to take advantage of the built-in GPS features on your Treo.
Windows Live Mail: The next generation of the Hotmail Web-based email application.
Windows Live Mail offers more storage, greater message security, and easier filing of
messages.
Windows Live Messenger: An instant messaging application that enables you to see
who’s online, to exchange instant messages (IM), to make calls to phones and computers
(including video calls), and to exchange pictures and other files.
Using Live Search for Windows Mobile®
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Live Search
.
3. The first time you use Live Search, follow the onscreen prompts to initiate use.
4. In the search bar at the top of the screen, enter the item you want to find.
5. Press Down to highlight the location field, and press Left and Right to scroll
through the location list. (To enter a new location, select the Choose a new location link.)
6. Press Search
(left softkey).
7. Select the item you want from the search results.
164
Section 3C: Using Messaging
Setting Up Windows Live Mail
You must have an existing Hotmail account to use Windows Live Mail. If you
do not have an account, use the Web browser on your Treo to go to
www.mobile.live.com/hm, and follow the steps to set up an account.
Before You
Begin
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Windows Live
.
3. Select Sign in to Windows Live.
4. The first time you sign in to Windows Live, press Accept
(left softkey).
5. Enter your Hotmail email address and password. (Check the box if you want to have
your password entered automatically every time you log in.)
6. Press Next
(left softkey).
Section 3C: Using Messaging
165
7. Set the following options:
Ⅲ Check the Live Search bar box to have the Live Search
bar appear on your Today screen.
Ⅲ Check the Windows Live services box to have Windows
Live Email and Windows Live Messenger appear on
your Today screen.
8. Press Next
(left softkey).
9. Select which application information—contacts, Windows
Live Messenger, and/or email—you want to synchronize
between the Windows Live mail server and Windows Live on your Treo. (For the
applications you choose, any information that appears in your Hotmail/Windows Live
account on the Web—for example, your email messages and contact list—appears in
Windows Live on your Treo when you synchronize.)
If you synchronize email, your Windows Live email account also appears in
the Inbox application. If you synchronize contacts, your Windows Live
contacts also appear in the Contacts application.
Note
10. Press Next
(left softkey).
11. Press Done
(left softkey) to display your Windows Live main page.
You can later change your Windows Live setup selections. Open Windows
Live, press Menu (right softkey), and then select Options. Change which
items appear on the Today screen or which applications sync, set up a sync
schedule, and more.
Tip
166
Section 3C: Using Messaging
Using Windows Live Mail
Make sure that your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see
Before You
Begin
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Windows Live
3. To synchronize email, contacts, and/or Windows Live Messenger information, press
Right or Left until Sync is highlighted, and then press Center . (Information is
.
synchronized for any of the three applications you selected during setup.)
4. To read your email, go to your Windows Live main page, and select Mail. (The Inbox
application opens and displays your Windows Live mail.)
You can view, send, and work with messages in your Windows Live account in the same way
Using Windows Live Messenger
You must have an existing Hotmail account to use Windows Live Messenger.
If you do not have an account, use the Web browser on your Treo to go to
www.mobile.live.com/hm, and follow the steps to set up an account. Make
sure that your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see
Before You
Begin
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Windows Live
.
3. Highlight Messenger by pressing Right or Left , and then press Center
.
Section 3C: Using Messaging
167
4. Press Sign in
(left softkey).
5. If you have not already set up a Windows Live Mail
account (see “Setting Up Windows Live Mail” on
page 165), the first time you sign in to Windows Live
Messenger, press Accept
(left softkey).
6. If prompted, enter your Hotmail email address
and password.
7. To send an instant message to a contact who is
online, highlight the contact name and press
Send IM
(left softkey).
If the contact you want is offline, send an email message instead. Highlight
the contact name and press Send e-mail (left softkey). Enter a subject and
body text for the email message, and then press Send (left softkey).
Tip
8. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Enter text: Highlight the text entry bar and enter your message text.
Ⅲ Record a voice note: Press Voice clip
(left softkey) and record a voice note by
speaking clearly with your Treo held up and facing you.
Ⅲ Add an emoticon to your message: Press Menu
(right softkey), select Add
emoticon, and then select the emoticon you want.
Ⅲ Add a picture or other file: Press Menu
(right softkey), select Send, select
the type of file you want to send, and then capture or select the picture or other
file you want.
168
Section 3C: Using Messaging
*
*
Text Entry Bar
9. Press Send (left softkey).
10. (Optional) To exchange messages with more than one person, press Menu
(right softkey), select Options > Add participant, and then select the participant you
want to add.
11. To end the messaging session, press Menu
(right softkey) and select End
conversation. (If you are exchanging messages with more than one person, select
End all conversations to stop all the sessions at once.)
From the Messenger contacts list screen, press Menu (right softkey) and
select options to add, block, or remove a contact; change your status to
Busy, Away, and so on; add a display picture or personal message; and
more.
Tip
Section 3C: Using Messaging
169
170
Section 3C: Using Messaging
Section 3D
Browsing the Web
In This Section
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Internet Explorer® Mobile provides quick and easy access to Web pages. You can view most
of the sites you use on your computer, including those with security and advanced features,
such as JavaScript and frames. Internet Explorer Mobile supports JavaScript, Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL), and cookies, but does not support plug-ins (Flash, Shockwave, and so on) or
Java applets.
Note
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
171
Viewing a Web Page
By default, Internet Explorer Mobile scales Web page content to fit your Palm® Treo™ 800W
smart device screen so that you can view most of the information without scrolling left or right.
You can also start a Web search from your Today screen by selecting the
Web Search field, entering the item you want to find, and then pressing
Center on the 5-way.
Did you know?
2. Press Start
and select Internet Explorer.
You can also open Internet Explorer by pressing and holding Option +
Phone/Talk.
Tip
3. Highlight the address line, enter the address of the
Web page you want to view, and then press Center
(If you browse to a secure Web page, the Lock icon in
the address line appears closed instead of open.)
.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey), select View, and then
select any of the following:
Ⅲ Zoom Level: Set the size of the text and images on
Web pages.
Ⅲ One Column: Display Web pages in one column that is
as wide as the screen, so that you don’t have to scroll
horizontally.
Ⅲ Fit to Screen: Maintain a layout similar to what you see on a desktop computer, but
items appear smaller and the content is arranged so that you can see most of it
without scrolling horizontally.
172
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
Ⅲ Desktop: Keep the same layout and size as on a desktop computer, which requires
both horizontal and vertical scrolling.
Ⅲ Full Screen: Hide the title bar and toolbar and fill the entire screen with the contents
of the Web page.
Ⅲ Show Pictures: Show or hide pictures on Web pages. (Hiding pictures speeds up
the time it takes to load pages.)
5. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ To view the previous page, press Back
(left softkey) or Backspace
.
Ⅲ To refresh the page with the latest content from the Internet, press Menu
(right
softkey) and select Refresh.
Ⅲ To scroll through the page, press Up
Down , Left , and Right to scroll in all directions.)
Ⅲ To follow a link to another Web page, press Up or Down
to go to the selected page. (You can also tap the link on
or Down . (In Desktop view, press Up
,
to highlight the link,
and then press Center
the screen with your stylus.)
To send a link to the current Web page, press Menu (right softkey) and
select Tools > Send Link. Select the Inbox or Messaging account you
want to use to send the link.
Tip
Ⅲ To view a Web page’s properties, press Menu
Tools > Properties.
Ⅲ To view each item in a list, tap the list with your stylus.
(right softkey) and select
Ⅲ In a list, press Down
or Left to cycle between items, and press Center
to make a selection.
Ⅲ In a form, such as a browser search field, press Center
to interact with the form,
and then press Center
to stop interacting with the form.
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
173
You can send email from a Web page. Email addresses appear as links on
Web pages. After you configure an email application on your Treo, you can
select an email link to create a message to send to that address.
Did you know?
6. Press OK
to close Internet Explorer Mobile.
To return to a recently viewed page, select the address line list, and then
press Down. Use the 5-way to select a Web address from the list.
Tip
The security certificates and 128-bit SSL strong encryption let you browse
secure sites, such as online shopping, banking, and email. Remember that
some secure sites also require specific browsers and may not work with
Internet Explorer Mobile. Ask the organization for an alternate Web address
(URL) that is compatible with Internet Explorer Mobile.
Did you know?
Working With Favorites
Favorites lets you bookmark a Web page so that you can instantly access it without entering
the Web address. If you set up synchronization with the desktop sync software, your favorites
synchronize by default.
To get favorites from the Web browser on your computer into the Web
browser on your Treo, just add them to the Mobile Favorites folder, which
shows up in your computer’s browser. When you sync, they become
available on your Treo as well. Backup copies of any favorites that you add
on the Treo browser are also stored in the Mobile Favorites folder.
Did you know?
174
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
Creating a Favorite
Create the folders where you want to store your favorites. Once you create a
favorite, you can’t move it to another folder.
Before You
Begin
1. Go to the page you want to mark as a favorite.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Add to Favorites.
3. (Optional) Select Name and enter a different description.
4. (Optional) Select Create in and select the folder where you
want to create the favorite.
5. Select Add.
Viewing a Favorite
1. Press Start
and select Internet Explorer.
2. Press Favorites
(left softkey).
3. Press Down
to highlight the page you want to view in the list, and then press
Center
to go to the selected page.
Organizing Your Favorites
You can create folders for organizing your favorites. For example, you can store travel links in
one folder, stock links in another, and business links in a third folder.
1. Press Start
and select Internet Explorer.
2. Press Favorites
(left softkey).
3. Select the Add/Delete tab.
4. Select New Folder.
5. Enter a name for this folder, and then press OK
.
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
175
To delete a favorite or folder, select Favorites (left softkey). Select the
Add/Delete tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and then select
Delete. Select Yes to confirm the deletion, and then press OK.
Tip
Working With Web Pages
Downloading Files and Images From a Web Page
You can download files that are usable on your Treo, such as new applications, MIDI
ringtones, or pictures that are specifically tagged for download.
1. Go to the page that contains the link to the item you want to download.
2. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ To download a file, press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, press
Center
, and then select Save As.
Ⅲ To download an image, tap and hold the image, select Save Image, and then
select Save As.
3. Select Name and enter a new name for the file.
4. Select the Location list, and then select where you want to store the file:
Main memory or Storage card.
5. Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the file.
6. Select Save.
Copying Text From a Web Page
You can copy text from a Web page and paste it in other applications.
1. Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Copy.
3. Go to the application in which you want to paste the text, and then position the cursor at
the location where you want to paste the text.
176
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Paste.
You can copy the text from the entire Web page. Tap and hold the page, and
select Select All Text. Tap and hold the page again, and select Copy.
Tip
Using the History List
The History list stores the addresses of the pages you visited recently.
1. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > History.
2. (Optional) Select the Page Title list in the upper-left corner, and then select how you
want to sort the History list.
3. Select the Web page you want to view.
For information on clearing the History list, see “Customizing Your Internet
Tip
Customizing Your Internet Explorer® Mobile Settings
1. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Options.
2. On the General tab, set the following options:
Ⅲ Home Page: Set the page that appears when you open
Internet Explorer Mobile. (To use the page you were on
when you opened the menu, select Use Current. To
select the original Sprint Power Vision home page,
select Use Default.)
Ⅲ Encoding: Set the character set for the Web pages
you view.
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
177
3. Select the Memory tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Save links to pages visited in the past: Set how many
days of activity the History list stores.
Ⅲ Clear History: Empty the History list.
Ⅲ Delete Files: Remove saved pages and Web files that
you viewed or synchronized with your computer.
4. Select the Security tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Allow cookies: Set whether your Treo accepts cookies
(small files containing information about your identity
and preferences). (The page sends the file and stores it
on your Treo.)
Ⅲ Clear Cookies: Delete any cookies stored on your Treo.
Ⅲ Warn when changing to a page that is not secure: Set
whether a message appears when you switch from a
secure page to one that is not secure.
Ⅲ Warn when page content is blocked due to security
settings: Set whether a message appears when you
attempt to open a page that does not meet the security standards of your Treo.
5. Press OK
.
178
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
Searching the Web From Your Today Screen
Need to find information quickly? Search the Web directly from your Today screen.
1. Make sure your phone is turned on and that you are inside a coverage area (see
3. Select the Live Search field and enter the word or phrase you want to find.
4. Press Search
(left softkey).
5. Use the 5-way to scroll through the results, and select the select the information you’re
looking for.
*
*
Live Search Field
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
179
180
Section 3D: Browsing the Web
Finding a Point of Interest
The next time you find yourself in unfamiliar territory, you can use your Palm® Treo™ 800W
smart device to get directions to a contact’s address, find the nearest pizza place, or view a
map of the area.
Make sure Location Privacy is set to Location On. Go to your Today screen
and press Menu (right softkey). Select Preferences > Phone Settings.
Select the Services tab, select Location Privacy, and then make sure
Location On is selected.
Before You
Begin
Finding a Point of Interest Near Your Current Location
1. Make sure your phone is turned on and that you are inside a coverage area (see
3. Select the Point of Interest lookup field and enter the type of place you want to find. (For
example, to find a pizza place, enter pizza; to find a post office, enter post office; or to
find an automated teller machine, enter ATM.)
4. Press Center
.
*
*
Point of Interest Field
182
Section 3E: Using GPS
Finding a Point of Interest Near Another Location
1. Make sure your phone is turned on and that you are inside a coverage area
2. Go to your Today screen.
3. Select the Point of Interest lookup field and enter the type of
place you want to find. (For example, to find a pizza place,
enter pizza; to find a post office, enter post office; or to find
an automatic teller machine, enter ATM.)
4. Select the list next to the Point of Interest lookup field and
select Near other location to open the Maps application.
5. In the Maps application, enter the zip code, city, state, or
address you want to use for your search.
6. Press Find
(left softkey).
Section 3E: Using GPS
183
Using Maps
Make sure Location Privacy is set to Location On. Go to your Today screen
and press Menu (right softkey). Select Preferences > Phone Settings.
Select the Services tab, select Location Privacy, and then make sure
Location On is selected.
Before You
Begin
1. Make sure your phone is turned on and that you are inside a coverage area (see
2. Press Start
and select Programs.
3. Select Maps
.
4. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Select the Map a street address link, enter the address
information, and then press Map
Ⅲ Select the Map a contact’s address link, select the
contact, and then press Find (left softkey).
(left softkey).
Ⅲ Select the Map your current location link.
Ⅲ Select the Map a recent location list, and select a
location from the list.
You can also find directions to a contact’s address from the Today screen
Tip
184
Section 3E: Using GPS
Using Sprint Navigation
Sprint Navigation is a GPS navigation system that gives you turn-by-turn directions by map
and by voice right from your Treo. Get audible GPS directions for an appointment, a sales call,
or even a coffee shop close by. Sprint Navigation requires a monthly subscription. Contact
Sprint for information and rates.
Make sure Location Privacy is set to Location On. Go to your Today screen
and press Menu (right softkey). Select Preferences > Phone Settings.
Select the Services tab, select Location Privacy, and then make sure that
Location On is selected.
Before You
Begin
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Sprint Navigation
.
Sprint Navigation is powered by Telenav satellites. For optimum
performance, use Sprint Navigation outdoors or close to a window. The
satellite signal is diminished when your Treo is indoors. Also, hold the
bottom portion of your Treo to avoid blocking the internal antenna, which is
located in the upper third of your Treo.
Tip
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to download the software and establish a subscription.
4. After you set up a subscription, and your account is
verified, press Go
(right softkey) to continue.
5. Use the 5-way to select the icon that best describes what
you want to do:
Ⅲ Drive To: Get turn-by-turn driving instructions to a
specific location.
Ⅲ Maps & Traffic: View a map and traffic information for
your current location or another location of your choice.
Section 3E: Using GPS
185
Ⅲ Search: Locate nearby services, such as the most inexpensive gas station in the
area or the closest bank or ATM.
Ⅲ Tools & Extra: Set Sprint Navigation options and to access other tools. For example
you can view a compass and assign your current location a name, such as home.
The External GPS settings described in “Setting Up an External GPS Device”
on page 337 do not affect Sprint Navigation.
Note
186
Section 3E: Using GPS
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
Many environments, such as corporate offices, coffee shops, airports, and libraries offer
access to a Wi-Fi network. A Wi-Fi network is a wireless local area network (WLAN) that is
based on the 802.11b/g standard. When you’re within range of an accessible Wi-FI network,
you can use the Wi-Fi feature of your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device to connect to that
network and access the Web.
Why Use a Wi-Fi Connection?
A Wi-Fi connection is especially helpful in the following situations:
ⅷ You’re outside a coverage area and you want to access the Web.
ⅷ Your Sprint service plan incurs additional charges for data services and you
want to minimize data service charges by using a Wi-Fi connection instead.
ⅷ You’re inside a coverage area but outside a Sprint Mobile Broadband Network.
(A Wi-Fi connection may provide faster throughput than a 1xRTT data connection.)
ⅷ You want to maintain a Web connection while talking on the phone.
You can use a Wi-Fi connection for scheduled synchronization with an
Exchange server, but you must use the Sprint Mobile Broadband Network to
take advantage of Microsoft Direct Push technology for wireless
synchronization with an Exchange server.
Note
Are there different types of Wi-Fi networks?
There are two types of Wi-Fi networks:
ⅷ
Open networks: These networks broadcast their name (SSID) and do not require you to
enter a password or other settings. To learn how to connect to an open network, see
188
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
ⅷ
Secure networks: These networks may broadcast their name, but at the very least, they
may also require you to enter a password that you get from a system administrator.
Secure networks may also require you to get other network settings from the system
administrator and enter them during setup. To learn how to connect to a secure network,
see “Connecting to a Secure Network” on page 191. If you've already set up a connection
to a secure network and want to reconnect to it, see “Connecting to an Open Network” on
Wi-Fi access point (also called a hotspot.) A network device with an
antenna that provides wireless connections to a larger network.
Key term
Turning the Wi-Fi Feature On and Off
*
*
Wi-Fi button
ⅷ To turn Wi-Fi on, press Wi-Fi
.
ⅷ To turn Wi-Fi off, press and hold Wi-Fi
.
Settings” on page 194 for details.
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
189
Wi-Fi Status Icons
The Wi-Fi icon on your Today screen indicates the status of the Wi-Fi feature.
The Wi-Fi feature on your Treo is turned on, but you are not connected to a Wi-Fi
network.
You have a Wi-Fi notification waiting. For example, if Wi-Fi is turned on and you are
not within range of a preferred network, you can tap this icon to view available
networks.
Your Treo is connected to a Wi-Fi network, and you are actively transmitting data.
Connecting to an Open Network
You can connect to an open network or to a secure network for which you already set up a
connection. If you have access to multiple Wi-Fi networks, you can select which network you
want to connect to.
The WEP (wired equivalent privacy) encryption method is enabled by default
and may interfere with your ability to connect to a network that broadcasts
to disable WEP encryption.
Note
1. Press Wi-Fi
on the top of your Treo. (Your Treo scans for available networks and
automatically connects when possible.)
You can narrow or expand the list of networks that appear on the Configure
Wireless Networks screen. Select the Networks to access list, and then
Tip
select the type of networks you want to view.
2. If your device was not able to automatically connect, the Configure Wireless Networks
screen appears; highlight the network to which you want to connect.
190
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
3. Press Connect
(left softkey) to connect to the selected
network.
4. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If Connected appears next to the network name, you
are ready to use the Wi-Fi connection. (For example,
open Internet Explorer® Mobile to browse the Web.)
Ⅲ If you are prompted to enter network settings, continue
with step 3 in the next section.
Some locations, such as airports and coffee shops, provide an
open network, but charge a fee to use it. After you connect your Treo to the network, you need
to open Internet Explorer Mobile and register with the Wi-Fi service provider before you can
browse the Web.
Connecting to a Secure Network
To set up a connection to a secure network, do the following:
1. Press Wi-Fi
on the top of your Treo. (Your device scans for available networks and
automatically connects when possible.)
2. When the Configure Wireless Network screen appears, do one of the following:
Ⅲ Highlight the network to which you want to connect, press Connect
softkey), and then skip ahead to step 4 to enter security settings for the selected
network.
(left
Ⅲ Select Add New if the network you want to connect to does not appear in the list.
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
191
3. Enter the following settings, and then press Next
(right softkey):
Ⅲ Network name: If this field is blank, enter the SSID
provided by the system administrator. (This field is case
sensitive.)
Ⅲ Connects to: Set whether this network connects to the
Internet or to Work. (You may need to select Work to
access a corporate intranet.)
Ⅲ This is a hidden network: If you had to enter the
network name, this is a hidden network. Check this box
to connect to this network now and in the future.
Ⅲ This is a device-to-device (ad-hoc) connection: Leave
this box unchecked if you're connecting to a network (Wi-Fi access point). (Check
this box only if you’re connecting to another device.)
4. Enter the following settings, and then press Next
(right softkey):
Ⅲ Authentication: Set the method used to identify
devices that connect to the network:
Ⅲ Open: The network uses open authentication.
Ⅲ Shared: The network uses shared authentication.
Ⅲ WPA: The network is a WPA network that uses
802.1x protocols.
Ⅲ WPA-PSK: The network is a WPA network that
requires a password that is shared between the
network and your Treo. This password is also
known as a pre-shared key (PSK).
Ⅲ WPA2: The network provides government grade security with an AES
encryption algorithm.
Ⅲ WPA2-PSK: The network is a WPA2 network that requires a pre-shared key.
192
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
Ⅲ Data Encryption: Set the encryption method. (The options in this list vary based on
your Authentication setting.)
Ⅲ Disabled: Turn data encryption off.
Ⅲ WEP: Turn on the Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption method.
Ⅲ TKIP: Turn on the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol encryption method. (This
method is often used to encrypt WPA and WPA-PSK connections.)
Ⅲ AES: Turn on the Advanced Encryption Standard protocol. (This method is often
used to encrypt WPA, WPA-PSK, WPA2, and WPA2-PSK connections.)
Ⅲ The key is automatically provided: Set whether you need to specify the network key
and key index provided by your system administrator, or whether the network
provides this information. The availability of these options varies based on your
Authentication and Data Encryption settings.
Ⅲ Network key: Enter the Network key provided by your system administrator, if it is not
automatically provided by the network. The availability of this option varies based on
your Authentication and Data Encryption settings.
Ⅲ Key index: Enter the Key index provided by your system
administrator, if it is not automatically provided by the
network. The availability of this option varies based on
your Authentication and Data Encryption settings.
5. Enter the following settings, and then press Finish
(right softkey):
Ⅲ Use IEEE 802.1x network access control: Set these
parameters if required by the network.
Ⅲ EAP type: Set the Extensible Authentication Protocol
type.
6. Press OK
.
If you also need to create a custom security certificate, see “Customizing
Note
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
193
Disconnecting From a Wi-Fi Network
To disconnect from a Wi-Fi network, do one of the following:
ⅷ To save any settings you entered, press and hold Wi-Fi
to disconnect from the Wi-Fi
network. The next time you’re within range and the Wi-Fi feature is turned on, your Treo
automatically connects to this network.
ⅷ Press Start
, select Settings, select the Connections tab, and then select Wi-Fi
.
Highlight the network from which you want to disconnect, and then press Disconnect
(left softkey).
ⅷ To remove the network settings from memory, press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Remove Settings. The next time you’re within range and the Wi-Fi feature is turned on, you
must re-create the connection to connect to this network.
Customizing Wi-Fi Settings
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select WiFi Prefs
.
3. On the Power tab, set any of the following:
Ⅲ Enable Power Save Mode: Conserve battery power
when Wi-Fi is turned on. For optimum battery
performance, leave this option enabled.
Ⅲ Connection: Set when the Wi-Fi feature is on and when
your Treo attempts to search for networks.
Ⅲ On Button Press: Leave the Wi-Fi feature off until you
press Wi-Fi
to turn it on. After you turn the Wi-Fi feature on, your Treo searches
for available networks.
Ⅲ Always On: Leave the Wi-Fi feature on. Your Treo searches for available
networks whenever the screen is awake. If a network to which you previously
connected is available, your device automatically connects to that network. To
prevent your Treo from searching for networks, press and hold Wi-Fi
to turn
the Wi-Fi feature off.
194
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
Ⅲ Scan: Search for available Wi-Fi networks. If your Treo locates an available
network, you can connect to it.
4. Select the Details tab to view information about an active Wi-Fi connection.
5. If the network you want to connect to requires a custom
certificate, select the Enroll tab and set the following:
Ⅲ User: Enter your username for access to this Wi-Fi
network.
Ⅲ Password: Enter your password.
Ⅲ Server: Enter the name of the Internet Information
Server (IIS) that stores the security certificate
information for this network.
Ⅲ Retrieve Certificate: Obtain the security certificate for
this Wi-Fi network.
6. Press OK
.
Ask your network administrator for your username, password, and server
name for the Wi-Fi network you want to access.
Note
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
195
Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology
With the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature of your Treo, you can connect to a number of
Bluetooth devices, such as a headset, printer, other phones and handhelds, and more. For a
list of hands-free devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are compatible with your
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize
wirelessly.
The Bluetooth status icon
The Bluetooth icon on your Today screen indicates the status of the Bluetooth feature:
Bluetooth off.
Bluetooth on.
Connected to a Bluetooth device.
Call in progress with a Bluetooth hands-free device.
Setting Up a Bluetooth Connection
After you set up a connection with a Bluetooth device, you can communicate with that device
whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth feature on your Treo is turned on. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet (10 meters). Performance and range are affected by physical obstacles,
radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
196
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
1. If necessary, prepare the device you want to connect with to
accept a new connection. (Check the device’s
documentation for details.)
.
3. Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box
to turn on the Bluetooth feature on your Treo. (Wait about
10 seconds for the Bluetooth feature to activate.)
4. If you’re setting up a connection with a computer, check the
Make this device discoverable to other devices box.
To prevent unwanted devices from connecting to your Treo, leave the Make
the device visible to other devices box unchecked except when you’re
Tip
connecting with a computer or receiving information from another device.
5. Select the Devices tab, and then select Add new device.
6. Wait for your Treo to search for devices and to display the device list.
7. Select the device you want to connect with, and then press Next
(right softkey).
8. If you’re prompted to enter a passkey, enter the same passkey on your Treo and on the
other Bluetooth device, and then press Next (right softkey).
Some Bluetooth devices have a predefined passkey. If your Bluetooth
device has a predefined passkey, your Treo attempts to enter the passkey
for you. If the attempt is unsuccessful, you can find the predefined passkey
in the documentation for your Bluetooth device.
Important
Other Bluetooth devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that
you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your
Treo and the Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you
make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals
only) to improve the security of your Treo. The longer the passkey, the more
difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
197
9. Press Done
(left softkey), and then press OK
.
You can now communicate with this device whenever it is within range and the Bluetooth
feature on your Treo is turned on. The range varies greatly, depending on environmental
factors. The maximum is about 30 feet (10 meters).
To modify or delete an established partnership with a device, go to the
Bluetooth Settings screen and select Devices. Highlight the connection
you want to change or remove, press and hold Center on the 5-way, and
then select Edit or Delete. A deleted device can no longer automatically
connect with your Treo.
Tip
Sending Information Over a Bluetooth Connection
You can send an individual entry or file.
1. Make sure the receiving device is ready to receive a
Bluetooth connection.
2. Highlight the entry or file you want to send.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Beam. (If you
don’t see a Beam command, select Send… > Beam
instead. The Beam and Send menu items change names
based on the type of item you highlighted.)
4. Select the receiving device in the list.
When the transmission is complete, Done appears next to the name of the receiving device.
Check your battery level before establishing a Bluetooth connection. If the
battery level is low, you can’t make a Bluetooth connection.
Tip
198
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
Receiving Information Over a Bluetooth Connection
1. Go to your Today screen, and then tap Bluetooth
.
2. Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth
feature on your Treo.
3. If you haven’t already set up a partnership with the transmitting device, check the Make
this device discoverable to other devices box to let the device find your Treo and request
a connection.
4. Press OK
5. When your Treo is receiving information, a notification tells you that a transmission is in
progress. (To stop the transmission, press Cancel [left softkey]; to close the
notification, press Dismiss [right softkey].)
.
If you have trouble receiving information over a Bluetooth connection, press
Start and select Settings. Select the Connections tab, and then select
Beam. Make sure the Receive all incoming beams box is checked.
Tip
Remember to uncheck the Make the device visible to other devices box
when you are done receiving information from the other device.
Synchronizing Over a Bluetooth Connection
Make sure your computer is equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology
and that your computer is set up for synchronization. See “Setting Up Your
Before You
Begin
1. Set up your computer for Bluetooth wireless communication. (For details, see the
documentation that came with your computer. In most cases your computer must
support the Virtual Serial Port profile, and this profile must be turned on.)
2. Set up the Microsoft® ActiveSync® software on your computer for Bluetooth wireless
communication. See ActiveSync Help on your computer for details.
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
199
3. Go to your Today screen, and then tap Bluetooth
.
4. Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth
feature on your Treo.
5. Press OK
.
6. Press Start
and select Programs.
7. Select ActiveSync
.
8. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Connect via Bluetooth.
9. If this is the first time you’re making a Bluetooth connection to this computer, follow the
onscreen prompts to set up a Bluetooth partnership with this computer.
10. Select Sync.
11. When synchronization has finished, press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Disconnect Bluetooth.
Wi-Fi routers, microwaves, and wireless telephones using the 2.4GHz band
may interfere with Bluetooth connections. For best results, move away from
this equipment when making a Bluetooth connection. If you cannot move
away, move the Bluetooth devices closer to improve the reception.
Tip
Beaming Information With IR
Your Treo is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that lets you beam information to another
device that has an IR port. The IR port is located on the side of your device closest to the
stylus, near the top.
200
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of
obstacles and both devices must be kept stationary. If you have difficulty
beaming, shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight.
Tip
The type of information you can beam depends on the type of device you
are beaming to. Other Windows Mobile® 6.1 Professional devices are
compatible with your Treo.
Beaming a Record
1. Highlight the entry or file you want to beam.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Beam. (If you don’t see a Beam command,
select Send… > Beam instead. The Beam and Send menu items change names based
on the type of item you highlighted.)
3. Point the IR port on your Treo directly at the IR port of the
receiving device.
4. When the name of the receiving device appears, select it to
begin the transfer.
5. Wait for “Done” to appear next to the name of the receiving
device before you continue using your Treo.
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
201
Receiving Beamed Information
1. Turn on your screen.
2. Point the IR port on your Treo directly at the IR port on the transmitting device.
3. When the Receiving Data message appears, select Yes to receive the beam.
If you can’t receive beamed information, press Start and select Settings.
Select the Connections tab, and then select Beam. Make sure the Receive
all incoming beams box is checked. If you still can’t receive information, try
Tip
Synchronizing Over an Infrared Connection
1. Set up your computer to receive infrared beams. (See ActiveSync Help on your
computer for details.)
2. Point the IR port on your Treo directly at the IR port on your computer.
3. On your Treo, press Start
and select Programs.
4. Select ActiveSync
5. Press Menu
.
(right softkey) and select Connect via IR.
6. Select Sync.
202
Section 3F: Using Wireless Connections
204
Synchronizing Your Pictures, Videos, and Music
You can synchronize pictures, videos, and music files between your Palm® Treo™ 800W
smart device and your computer. How synchronization happens, however, depends on two
conditions:
ⅷ
Sync direction: Are you transferring the files from your Treo to your computer or from your
computer to your Treo?
ⅷ
Operating system: Do you use Windows XP or Windows Vista®?
These procedures do not apply to files in your Windows Media® Player
Note
page 227 for details on synchronizing your library files.
For best results, use Windows Media Player to sync your music files—for
both Windows XP and Windows Vista computers.
Tip
Synchronizing Pictures, Videos, and Music: Windows XP
Do the following to synchronize pictures, videos, and music files that you capture on or copy
to your Treo.
Install Microsoft® ActiveSync® desktop software from the Getting Started CD
Before You
Begin
206
Section 4A: Synchronizing Your Media Files
Desktop Sync Software” on page 48 for details).
2. To find synchronized pictures and videos on your computer, go to: C:\Documents and
Settings\<Username>\My Documents\<device name>My Documents. This folder has
subfolders for My Music, My Pictures, and My Videos.
Do the following to sync pictures, videos, and music files that originate on your computer.
1. Connect your Treo to your computer with the USB sync cable.
Most ActiveSync desktop software options are available only when your
Treo is connected to your computer.
Note
2. On your computer, double-click the
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer screen to
open the ActiveSync desktop software window. (If
you don’t see the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar,
click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync
to open the ActiveSync window.)
3. Under Information Type, double-click Files to view
a list of the files in the Files sync folder. (If you
don’t see the Files option, open the Tools menu,
select Options, and make sure the Files box is
checked.)
4. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ To copy a file from your computer to your Treo, click Add, browse to and highlight
the file, and then click Open.
Ⅲ To delete a file from the Files sync folder on your computer and from your Treo,
highlight the file name and click Remove.
Section 4A: Synchronizing Your Media Files
207
If you receive an error while synchronizing files, make sure that all of the files
you’re trying to sync are closed on both your computer and on your Treo.
Tip
If a Treo My Documents sync folder has been created on your computer,
you can also sync by dragging files into the appropriate subfolder under
that folder.
Synchronizing Pictures, Videos, and Music: Windows Vista®
Do the following to synchronize pictures, videos, and music files that you capture on or copy
to your Treo.
Make sure Windows Mobile Device Center is installed on your computer
page 47).
Before You
Begin
1. Connect your Treo to your computer with the USB sync cable.
2. If Windows Mobile Device Center does not open automatically, on your computer, click
Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center.
3. Select Connect without setting up your device.
4. Select Pictures, Music and Video.
5. Select X new pictures/video clips are available for import.
6. (Optional) Add a tag name for the pictures and videos you are importing.
7. Click Import.
8. To find all synchronized (imported) pictures and videos on your computer, click Start >
Pictures, or go to: C:\Users\<Username>\Pictures.
208
Section 4A: Synchronizing Your Media Files
Each time you import pictures and videos from your Treo, Windows Mobile
Device Center creates a subfolder in the Pictures folder based on the
current date and any tag you select during the import process
Note
To synchronize music files that originate on your Treo, and pictures, videos, and music files
Section 4A: Synchronizing Your Media Files
209
210
Section 4A: Synchronizing Your Media Files
About Your Camera
Your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, 2.0-megapixel
camera with 2x digital zoom. You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos
and send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your Treo, use your
pictures as your Today screen background and as caller ID images.
Taking Pictures and Videos
Taking a Picture
By default, pictures are stored in the My Pictures folder on your Treo. If you want to store your
pictures on an expansion card (sold separately), you can change where pictures are stored
accessing your pictures on your computer, see “Synchronizing Your Media Files” on
Pictures are captured and stored in 16-bit color, JPG format. Resolution
settings range from a low end of 160x120 pixels to a high end of 1600x1200
pixels. You can change the default setting. See “Customizing Your Pictures &
Videos Settings” on page 222 for details.
Did you know?
1. Press Start
2. Select Camera
mode is on. To turn on the still camera, press Menu
and select Pictures & Videos.
. (If you see a camcorder
icon below the preview image, video
(right softkey) and select Still.)
You can also access the camera feature by pressing Option + Start.
Tip
212
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
3. Aim your Treo, as you would any camera, to frame the
subject in the device’s screen. (Your Treo has a self-portrait
mirror next to the camera lens on the back of your device.
Use the mirror when you’re taking a picture or video and
you want to be in the picture too.)
4. (Optional) Adjust any of the following:
Ⅲ Zoom: Press Up
to zoom in, or Down
to zoom
out.
Ⅲ Brightness: Press Right to increase the brightness,
so you can take pictures in low-light environments, or press Left to decrease the
brightness.
Ⅲ Resolution: Press Menu
(right softkey) and
select Resolution to change the image quality.
You can also adjust the zoom and brightness by pressing Menu and
selecting Zoom or Brightness.
Tip
5. (Optional) Set a five-second timer: Press Menu
(right softkey), select Mode, and
then select Timer.
6. Press Center
to capture the picture or start the timer.
7. Hold your Treo still until the picture renders, and then press OK
to save the picture,
or press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete to discard the picture.
8. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ Press Center
to take another picture.
(left softkey) to return to Thumbnails view.
Ⅲ Press Thumbnails
After three minutes of inactivity when you are previewing an image, the
camera goes into standby mode. Press any key or tap the screen to return
to the image preview.
Did you know?
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
213
Taking Pictures in Burst Mode
Burst mode takes five pictures in quick succession, with one button press. Burst mode is
particularly useful for taking pictures of situations where there is movement, for example, while
photographing children, sports, or animals.
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Press Camera
3. Press Menu
4. Press Center
(left softkey).
(right softkey) and select Mode > Burst.
.
Recording a Video
By default, you can capture 30-second videos and store them in the My Pictures folder on
your Treo. If you want to store your videos on an expansion card or capture longer videos
(provided you have ample storage space), see “Customizing Your Pictures & Videos Settings”
on page 222 to change your video settings. For information on transferring your videos to
stored in 3G2 format. Video resolution settings range from 176 x 144 pixels to 320 x 240
pixels.
You must have QuickTime Player version 6.5 or later installed on your
computer to play videos recorded by your Treo.
Before You
Begin
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Select Camera
.
214
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Video.
4. Aim your Treo, as you would any camera, to frame your
subject in the device’s screen.
5. (Optional) Adjust the following settings:
Ⅲ Brightness: Press Right to increase the brightness or
Left to decrease the brightness.
Ⅲ Resolution: Press Menu
Quality to change the video resolution.
6. Press Center to start recording.
7. To stop recording, press Stop
8. Press Thumbnails (left softkey) to return to Thumbnails view.
9. (Optional) To review the video in Windows Media® Player Mobile, highlight the video in
(right softkey) and select
(left softkey) or Center
.
Thumbnails view, and then press Play
(left softkey) or Center
. (Press OK
to
return to Thumbnails view.)
If you don’t like a video you recorded, delete it. See “Deleting a Picture or
Video” on page 221 for details.
Tip
If you pause your recording for more than three minutes, the recording is
stopped and the video clip is automatically saved.
Did you know?
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
215
Viewing Pictures and Videos
Viewing a Picture
In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view pictures
that are captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the Internet. Your
Treo supports the following picture formats:
ⅷ JPG, JPEG, JPE
ⅷ GIF
ⅷ BMP
ⅷ WBMP
ⅷ PNG
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the picture you want to view.
3. Press OK
to return to Thumbnails view.
To view pictures that are stored in a different folder, select the list in the
upper-left corner, and then select the album you want to view.
Tip
Viewing a Video
In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera, you can view videos
captured on many popular digital cameras or streamed from Web sites. Your Treo supports
MPEG-4, H.264, H.263, and Windows Media videos with the following file extensions:
ⅷ MP4 (M4V)
ⅷ 3GPP (3GP)
ⅷ 3GPP2 (3G2)
ⅷ Windows Media (WMV, ASF)
216
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
3. Press OK
to return to Thumbnails view.
To view videos that are stored in a different folder, select the list in the
upper-left corner, and then select the album you want to view.
Tip
Viewing a Slide Show
You can view your pictures as a slide show on your Treo. Each picture displays for five
seconds before changing to the next slide.
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the list in the upper-left corner and select the folder containing the pictures you
want to view as a slide show.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Play Slide Show.
4. Press Center
to display the slide show toolbar.
5. Use any of the following icons to control the slide show: Rotate , Play , Pause
Reverse , Forward , and Stop
,
.
You can also press Right and Left on the 5-way to move forward or
backward through the pictures.
Tip
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
217
Sending Pictures and Videos
You can send a picture or video to other picture-enabled wireless devices or to an
email address.
You cannot send copyrighted pictures or videos that appear with a Lock
icon in Thumbnails view.
Did you know?
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight the picture or video you want to send.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Send.
4. Select the Inbox or Microsoft® Windows LiveTM account you want to use to send the
picture or video.
page 136 for details.)
Organizing Pictures and Videos
You can move or copy pictures and videos to other folders or between your Treo and an
expansion card.
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight the picture or video you want to move or copy.
3. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ To move the picture or video, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Cut.
(right softkey) and select
Ⅲ To copy the picture or video, press Menu
Edit > Copy.
218
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
4. Select the list in the upper-left, and select the location where you want to place the
picture or video you selected in step 2.
5. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Paste.
You can also view a specific folder or expansion card and arrange the pictures and videos by
name, date, or size.
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the list in the upper-left corner, and then select the folder you want to view.
3. Select the list in the upper-right corner, and then select the sort method: Name, Date, or
Size.
When you capture new pictures and videos, they appear as the last items in
Thumbnails view. To place the new items in the appropriate sort order,
refresh the screen by selecting a different sort method or closing and
reopening Pictures & Videos.
Tip
Using a Picture as the Today Screen Background
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight the picture you want to use.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Set as Today Background.
4. Select the Transparency Level list and select the appropriate level. (Use a higher
percentage for a more transparent picture or a lower percentage for a more
opaque picture.)
5. Press OK
to return to Thumbnails view.
You can also use the Today Settings screen to set the Today screen
for details.
Tip
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
219
Adding a Picture to a Contact Entry
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight the picture you want to use.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Save to Contact.
4. Select the contact you want to add the picture to.
Editing Pictures
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Open the picture you want to edit.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
4. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ To rotate a picture 90 degrees counterclockwise, press Rotate
(left softkey).
Ⅲ To crop a picture, press Menu
(right softkey), select Crop, and then tap and
drag the stylus to highlight the area to crop. (Tap inside the cropped area to accept
the crop. Tap outside the box to cancel the crop.)
Ⅲ To adjust the brightness and contrast levels of a picture, press Menu
(right
softkey) and select AutoCorrect.
Ⅲ To keep both your original image and the revised image, press Menu
(right
softkey) and select Save As.
5. Press OK
to save your changes.
To undo an edit, press Menu (right softkey) and select Undo. To cancel all
unsaved edits you made to the picture, select Revert to Saved.
Tip
220
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
For more extensive edits, sync your picture or video to your computer and
edit it in your favorite graphics program. Then sync the picture or video back
to your Treo.
Tip
Deleting a Picture or Video
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight the picture or video you want to delete.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete.
4. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Renaming a Picture or Video
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight the picture or video you want to rename.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Properties.
4. Enter a new name for the picture or video.
5. Press OK
to return to Thumbnails view.
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
221
Customizing Your Pictures & Videos Settings
You can customize the camera on your Treo as described in the following section.
1. Press Start
and select Pictures & Videos.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Options.
3. On the General tab, set the following options:
Ⅲ Use this picture size: Set the size of pictures you send
via email.
Ⅲ When rotating a picture, rotate 90 degrees: Set the
direction in which pictures rotate.
4. Select the Slide Show tab and set the following options:
Ⅲ During slide shows, optimize for viewing: Set whether
pictures are optimized for portrait or landscape format
during slide shows.
Ⅲ Play screensaver when connected to my PC and idle
for 2 minutes: Set whether the pictures in your My
Pictures folder are used as a screensaver on your Treo
when your Treo is connected to your computer and the
desktop synchronization software is not running.
222
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
5. Select the Camera tab and set the following options:
Ⅲ Type filename prefix: Assign a name to a series of
pictures to be captured, such as Seattle001, Seattle002,
and so on.
Ⅲ Save files to: Set whether pictures and videos are
stored on your Treo or on an expansion card.
Ⅲ Still image compression level: Set the default size for
newly captured pictures.
6. Select the Video tab and set the following options:
Ⅲ Include audio when recording video files: Turn the
microphone on and off so that you can record videos
with or without sound.
Ⅲ Time limit for videos: Limit the length of videos you
record. (You can also select the No limit option.)
7. Press OK
to return to the Thumbnails view.
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
223
224
Section 4B: Working With Your Pictures and Videos
Windows Media® Player Mobile can play music, audio, and video files that are stored on your
Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device or on an expansion card (sold separately) in any of the
following file formats:
ⅷ WMA
ⅷ WMV
ⅷ WAV
ⅷ MP3
ⅷ MP4
ⅷ M4A
ⅷ 3GP
ⅷ 3G2
ⅷ AAC
ⅷ AMR
ⅷ QCP
Because music, audio, and video files are so large, we recommend that you use a microSD
or microSDHC expansion card to store the files you want to play on your Treo. You can listen
to these music, audio, and video files through the speaker on the back of your Treo or through
the included microUSB stereo headset. To use a headset with another type of connector, you
must attach an adapter (sold separately).
Do the following:
Before You
Begin
•
Make sure you have Windows Media Player 10 or later installed on
•
(Optional) Obtain an expansion card to store your media files.
226
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
On a Windows XP computer, Windows Media Player must be installed on
Note
your computer before you install Microsoft® ActiveSync® desktop software.
You can install ActiveSync desktop software from the Getting Started CD for
Palm Treo 800w smart device that came with your Treo. Windows Media
Player 11 is already installed on Windows Vista® computers.
Synchronizing Windows Media® Player Library Files
Use the Sync feature in the desktop version of Windows Media Player to transfer your
Windows Media Player library files from your computer to an expansion card or your Treo.
Your library can include digital music, audio, video, and playlist files. Using Sync ensures that
your Windows Media Player library files transfer correctly.
The pictures and videos you create with the camera on your Treo are not
part of your Windows Media Player library. See “Synchronizing Your Media
Files” on page 205 for information on transferring pictures and videos from
the built-in camera to your computer.
Note
During setup, Windows Media Player selects the sync method (automatic or manual) that
works best for your Treo:
ⅷ
Automatic: If you’re using an expansion card that is larger than 4GB and your entire
library can fit on the card, Windows Media Player automatically syncs your entire library
when you connect your Treo to your computer or when you change sync settings. You
can also choose which playlists you want to sync automatically.
ⅷ
Manual: You indicate which files or playlists you want to transfer each time you update the
digital media files on your Treo. To remove files from your Treo, you must delete them
manually.
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
227
After you complete initial setup, you can switch between automatic and manual sync.
The following steps are for Windows Media Player 11. If you’re using another
version of Windows Media Player, the steps may vary.
Note
1. On your computer, open Windows Media Player.
2. (Optional) Insert a 32MB or larger expansion card into your Treo.
3. Connect your Treo to your computer with the USB sync cable.
4. Wait for the Device Setup wizard to open on your computer, and then click Finish.
5. In Windows Media Player on your computer, click the Sync tab and select Portable
media device > Set Up Sync.
6. Select the playlists and files you want to sync, and then click Add.
7. Click Finish, and then click Start Sync.
Be patient; transferring media files to an expansion card can take several minutes. To find
your synchronized files, update the library in Windows Media Player (see “Working With
Libraries” on page 231). The files appear in the updated libraries.
For tips on using the desktop version of Windows Media Player, go to the
Help menu in Windows Media Player on your computer.
Tip
228
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
Playing Media Files
1. Press Start
and select Windows Media.
2. If you don’t see Library in the upper-left corner, press Menu
(right softkey) and
select Library.
To play a file that is not in a library, go to the Library screen, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Open File.
Tip
3. Select the folder that contains the item you want to play, (such as a video, song, album,
or artist name), and if necessary select a subfolder to select a specific item.
4. Press Play
(left softkey).
To repeat the current video or song, press Menu (right softkey) and select
Shuffle/Repeat.
Tip
5. Use any of the following onscreen and keyboard controls
during playback:
or Center
: Play the current file.
or Center
: Pause the current file.
or Left : Skip to the beginning of the current file or to
the previous file. (Press and hold Left to rewind.)
or Right : Skip to the next file. (Press and hold Right
to fast forward.)
: Set the point from which playback begins. (Tap and drag the slider to change the
current position.)
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
229
or Volume button: Increase the volume level.
or Volume button: Decrease the volume level.
: Turn the sound on or off.
: Display a video using the full screen.
: Display a Web site where you can find music and videos to play.
: Set your rating of the current file. (Select the stars in the upper-right corner to change
the rating.)
6. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select any of the following during playback:
Ⅲ Library: Display the Library screen so you can select a different video or song to
play.
Ⅲ Play/Pause: Stop playback temporarily and restarts playback.
Ⅲ Shuffle/Repeat > Shuffle: Play the Now Playing playlist in random order.
Ⅲ Shuffle/Repeat > Repeat: Play the Now Playing playlist repeatedly.
Ⅲ Stop: End playback.
If you close the Windows Media Player Mobile window, your music
continues to play in the background. Your music pauses automatically when
you receive a call. To stop the music, slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off,
or open Windows Media Player Mobile and press Center on the 5-way.
Did you know?
To play a file from the Web, press Menu on the Library screen, and then
select Open URL. Select URL and enter the Web site address, or select
History and select a site you’ve visited before.
Tip
230
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
Working With Libraries
A library represents each of the storage locations available to Windows Media Player Mobile,
such as your Treo or an optional expansion card (sold separately). Each library contains links
to the media files in that location. Windows Media Player Mobile usually creates and updates
the library automatically when you add media files for the first time. For example, when you
add media files to your Treo, the My Device library is created. When you insert an expansion
card containing media files, the Storage Card library is created. When you update a library, it
automatically updates video files (WMV, MP4, M4V, 3G2, and 3GP) and audio files (WMA,
MP3, M4A, QCP, WAV, AMR, and AAC).
If you move files between your Treo and an expansion card, be sure to
update your libraries, or you won’t be able to see the files in their new
location.
Tip
1. Press Start
and select Windows Media.
2. If you’re not on the Library screen, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Library to
go to the Library screen.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Update Library.
4. Wait for the files to be added, and then select Done. (If you don’t see a media file that
you added, manually update the library.)
To delete an item from a library: Highlight the item and then press and hold
Center on the 5-way to open the shortcut menu. Then select Delete from
Library. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Tip
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
231
Working With Playlists
A playlist is a list of media files that play in a specific order. You can use playlists to group
audio files together or video files together for convenient playback. For example, in the
desktop player, you can create a playlist of upbeat songs for when you exercise and a playlist
of soothing songs for a long flight. When you synchronize, your favorite playlists are
automatically copied to your Treo. Your playlists appear in your libraries (in the My Playlists
category).
A temporary playlist, called Now Playing, appears on the Now Playing menu. It lists the
currently playing file, as well as any files that are queued up to play next. You can add to,
modify, or clear the files on the Now Playing playlist.
1. Go to the Now Playing screen:
Ⅲ If you are on the Library screen, select the Now Playing
category.
Ⅲ If you are on the Playback screen, press Now Playing
(left softkey).
2. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Move a file up or down one slot: Highlight the file and
then select Move Up
or Move Down
.
Ⅲ Add a file to the playlist: Select Add
to go to your
Library list, highlight the file you want to add, press Menu
then select Queue Up. (To return to your playlist, press Menu
and select Now Playing.)
(right softkey), and
[right softkey]
Ⅲ Delete a file from the playlist: Highlight the file and then select Remove
.
Ⅲ View more information about a file: Highlight the file and select Properties
.
Ⅲ Remove all items from the Now Playing playlist: Press Menu
(right softkey) and
select Clear Now Playing.
232
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
Ⅲ Keep the playlist so you can play it later: Press Menu
(right softkey), select
Save Playlist, and then enter a name for the playlist.
You can also move a file on the Now Playing playlist by tapping and
dragging it to a new position.
Did you know?
Customizing Windows Media Player Mobile
1. If necessary, go to the Playback screen by pressing OK
to close the current screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
3. On the Playback tab, set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Show time as: Set whether the time remaining or time
elapsed appears on the Playback screen.
Ⅲ Pause playback while using another program: Set
whether playback continues if you switch to another
application.
Ⅲ Resume playback after a phone call: Set whether
playback continues after you finish a phone call.
4. Select the Video tab and select either of the following
options:
Ⅲ Play video in full screen: Set whether videos automatically play in full-screen format.
Ⅲ Scale to fit window: Set whether videos are automatically scaled to fit the Playback
screen.
5. Select the Network tab and set the following options:
Ⅲ Protocol: Set the available protocols. (You must select at least one protocol. You can
also set a UDP port.)
Ⅲ Internet Connection Speed: Set the speed of your network connection and whether
you want the device to detect connection speed.
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
233
6. Select the Library tab and set whether the Library screen or the Playback screen
appears when you open Windows Media Player Mobile.
7. Select the Skins tab and select Previous or Next until you display the skin you want as
the player’s background.
8. Select the Buttons tab and do any of the following to
change any of the available button settings:
Ⅲ Assign a button: Highlight the item you want to set,
select Assign, and then press the button you want to
use for that item.
Ⅲ Restore an item’s factory setting: Highlight the item
and select Reset.
Ⅲ Unassign an item: Highlight the item and select None.
9. Press OK
.
You can preserve battery life by assigning a button to toggle the screen off
and on during playback. On the Buttons tab, set the Toggle option, and
then press the assigned key (for instance, S) to turn the screen on and off
during playback.
Did you know?
234
Section 4C: Playing Media Files
236
Contacts
Adding a Contact
If you have many contacts to enter, it’s best to enter them in Microsoft®
Computer” on page 41 for details.
Tip
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Contacts.
You can also open the Contacts application by pressing and holding
Option while you press Calendar.
Tip
3. Press New
(left softkey).
4. If prompted, indicate whether this is an Outlook contact or a
Windows Live contact.
5. Use the 5-way navigator to move between fields as you
enter information.
6. To enter complete name or address (work, home, or other)
information, move the cursor to the appropriate field (such
as Work addr or Home addr), press Center
, and then
press Right (or tap the arrow on the right side of the line)
and enter the information in the box that appears. (To
accept the information and close the box, press Left or tap outside the box.)
7. To add a caller ID picture that appears when that person calls, select Picture, select
Camera, and then take a picture, or select an existing picture from Thumbnails view.
238
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
8. To assign the entry to one or more categories, select Categories and then check the
categories under which you want this entry to appear. (To add a new category, press
New
(left softkey), enter the category name, and then press OK
.)
9. To assign a ringtone to the entry, select Ring tone and select a tone.
10. To add a note to an entry, select the Notes tab.
11. After you enter all the information, press OK
.
Be sure to enter wireless numbers and email addresses in the correct fields
so that Inbox and Messaging can find this information when you address a
message, and Calendar can find your contacts when you want to invite
them to meetings.
Tip
To enter an international phone number, enter a + (plus sign) in front of the
country code.
Viewing or Changing Contact Information
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to view or edit:
Ⅲ First name.
Ⅲ Last name.
Ⅲ First initial and last initial separated by a space.
3. Highlight the contact’s name and press Center
.
4. Select Open Contact.
5. Press Menu
6. Make changes to the entry as necessary.
7. Press OK
(right softkey) and select Edit.
.
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
239
You can find a contact by company name. From your Today screen, press
Menu (right softkey) and select Contacts. Press Menu (right softkey) and
select View By > Company. Select a company name to see the contacts
who work there.
Did you know?
To view a particular group of contacts, press Menu (right softkey), select
Filter, and then select the category you want to view.
Tip
Viewing a Map of a Contact’s Address
You can view a map of a contact’s address directly from your Today screen.
1. Make sure your phone is turned on and that you are inside a coverage area (see
2. Go to your Today screen.
3. Using the keyboard, begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to map:
Ⅲ First name.
Ⅲ Last name.
Ⅲ First initial and last initial separated by a space.
Ⅲ First and last name.
4. Highlight the contact’s name and press Center
.
5. Select Find. (The Maps application opens and displays the contact’s location on a map.)
If you subscribe to the Sprint Navigation service, you can also get driving
directions. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Directions To/From or
information.
Did you know?
240
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Deleting a Contact
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Contacts.
3. Highlight the contact you want to delete.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete Contact.
5. Select Yes.
Customizing Contacts
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Contacts.
(right softkey) and select Options.
3. Press Menu
4. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Show alphabetical index: Display the alphabet at the top of the Contacts list. Select
a letter range to jump to that part of the alphabet.
Ⅲ Show contact names only: Hide everything but the contact’s name, which enables
you to fit more names on the screen when viewing your Contacts list.
Ⅲ Area code: Set the default area code for new contact entries.
5. Press OK
.
Finding a Contact in an Online Address Book
In addition to having contacts on your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device, you can also access
contact information from your organization’s online address book or Global Address List
(GAL).
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
241
Do the following:
Before You
Begin
•
•
•
Make sure you are accessing Microsoft® Exchange Server 2007 or
Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2.
Add access to the online address book, see “Adding an Online
Synchronize with the Exchange server after you add the online
(Otherwise the Company Directory option does not appear.)
1. Go to your Today screen.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Contacts.
(right softkey) and select Company Directory.
3. Press Menu
4. Enter the contact’s name (in part or in full), and then press Find
(right softkey).
(You must spell the contact’s name correctly to find it in the online address book.)
Calendar
Displaying Your Calendar
1. Press Calendar
.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select View.
3. Select one of the following views:
Ⅲ Agenda: View your daily schedule in list format. (Upcoming appointments are bold;
past appointments are dimmed.)
Ⅲ Day: View your daily schedule in day-planner format.
Ⅲ Week: View your schedule for an entire week.
Ⅲ Month: View your schedule for a whole month.
A morning appointment.
242
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
An afternoon or evening appointment.
Both morning and afternoon or evening appointments.
An all-day event.
Ⅲ Year: View the first nine months of the current year. (Press Down
to see the next
set of months, or press Up
to see the previous set.)
4. Use the 5-way to move to another day, week, month, or year (based on the current
view).
You can also scroll through the various views (Agenda, Day, Week, Month,
and Year) by pressing Calendar repeatedly.
Tip
Creating an Appointment
If you have several appointments to enter, it’s most efficient to enter them in
Tip
Microsoft Office Outlook on your computer and then synchronize your Treo
with your computer. For more information, see “Connecting to Your
1. Press Calendar
.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select
New Appointment.
3. Enter a Subject (description) and a Location.
4. Select Starts and select the starting date and time.
5. Select Ends and select the ending date and time.
6. Press OK
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
243
To pencil in an appointment, open the appointment, press Menu (right
softkey), and select Edit. Select Status and then select Tentative.
Tip
Creating an Untimed Event
An untimed event, such as a birthday, anniversary, or vacation,
does not occur at a particular time. These events appear as
banners at the top of your calendar; they don’t occupy blocks of
time. For example, in the illustration shown here, “Submit Final
Draft” is an untimed event.
1. Press Calendar
.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select New
Appointment.
3. Enter a subject (description).
4. Select the starting and ending dates.
5. Select All Day and then select Yes.
6. Press OK
.
Scheduling a Repeating Appointment
1. Create an appointment or untimed event, and then select it.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
3. Select Occurs and then select a repeat pattern. (To create a repeat pattern, select Edit
pattern and follow the onscreen instructions.)
4. Press OK
.
To enter a birthday or an anniversary, create an untimed event that repeats
every year.
Tip
244
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Adding an Alarm Reminder to an Event
1. Create an event, and then select it.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
3. Select Reminder and then select Remind Me.
4. Enter the number of minutes, hours, days, or weeks before the event that you want to
receive the alarm.
5. Press OK
.
1
2
1
2
Type of Time Units
Number of Time Units
You can also add an alarm when you create the event.
Tip
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
245
Sending a Meeting Request
You can email meeting invitations to contacts who use the desktop version of Microsoft
Outlook or Microsoft® Outlook® Mobile.
Create contact entries with email addresses for the people you want to invite
someone to a meeting unless you have an email address for them in the
Contacts application.
Before You
Begin
1. Create an event, and then select it.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
3. Select Attendees and then select Add Required Attendee.
4. Select the contact you want to invite.
5. To invite more attendees, select Add Required Attendee and select the names.
6. To invite optional attendees, select Add Optional Attendee and select the names.
7. Press OK
.
The next time synchronization occurs, the meeting request is sent to the attendees.
When attendees accept your meeting request, the meeting is automatically added to
their schedules. As you receive each response, your calendar is updated as well.
If you are using Microsoft Exchange 2003 Server with Service Pack 2, you
can use your corporate Global Address List to find contact information for
an attendee. Select Attendees and select Add Required Attendee or Add
Optional Attendee. Press Menu (right softkey), and select Company
Directory. Enter the name of the attendee and select Find.
Did you know?
246
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Marking an Event as Sensitive
If other people have access to your Microsoft Office Outlook calendar on your computer and
you don’t want them to see an appointment, you can mark that appointment as private to hide
it from other Microsoft Office Outlook users.
1. Create an event and then open it.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
3. Select Sensitivity and then select one of the following:
Ⅲ Normal: The event displays without any notation.
Ⅲ Personal: If the event is a meeting, recipients see “Please treat this as Personal”
near the top of an open appointment.
Ⅲ Private: If the event is a meeting, recipients see “Please treat this as Private” near the
top of an open appointment. (If you sync with an Exchange server, other users who
can access your folders can’t see your private events; private events appear as
unavailable time slots.)
Ⅲ Confidential: If the event is a meeting, recipients see “Please treat this as
Confidential” near the top of an open appointment.
4. Press OK
.
If you don’t see an option on the screen, press Down on the 5-way to scroll
to other options. For example, when editing an event, you don’t see the
Sensitivity option until you scroll toward the bottom of the entry.
Tip
To remove sensitivity status from an item, select Normal from the Sensitivity
list.
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
247
Organizing Your Schedule
Use categories to view various types of events.
1. Create an event and then select it.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit.
3. Select Categories and then check the categories that apply
to this event. (To add a new category, press New
softkey), enter the category name, and then press OK
(left
.)
4. Press OK
two more times.
5. After you assign events to categories, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Filter.
6. Select the type of events you want to view.
Deleting an Event
1. Highlight the event you want to delete.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete Appointment.
3. Select Yes.
Customizing Calendar
1. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Options.
2. On the General tab, set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Start in: Set which view appears when you open the
Calendar application.
Ⅲ 1st day of week: Set Sunday or Monday as the first day
of the week for all Calendar views.
Ⅲ Week view: Set whether five, six, or seven days appear
in Week view.
248
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Ⅲ Show half hour slots: Set whether time slots appear in one-hour or half-hour
increments in Day view and Week view.
Ⅲ Show week numbers: Set whether week numbers (1–52) appear in Week view.
3. Select the Appointments tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Set reminders for new items: Set whether a reminder is
automatically added to new events and how long
before the event the reminder appears. (You can
override this setting for individual events.)
Ⅲ Show icons: Set which icons appear next to events.
The event has a reminder.
The event repeats in a specified pattern.
The event has a note attached.
The event has an assigned location.
The event is a meeting.
The event is marked private.
Not all icons appear in all Calendar views.
Tip
Ⅲ Send meeting requests via: Set the method used to send meeting requests.
4. Press OK
.
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
249
Tasks
You can use Tasks to help you remember tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of
completed tasks.
If you want to use Tasks Over the Air (OTA) synchronization, install the
software from your Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device.
OTA features also require Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange
Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. The option to synchronize tasks
Did you know?
wirelessly in the ActiveSync® application appears only if you have the
appropriate server.
Adding a Task
1. Press Start
2. Select Tasks
3. Press Menu
and select Programs.
.
(right softkey) and select New Task.
4. Enter a description of the task in the Subject field.
5. Set any of the following:
Ⅲ Priority: Set the priority level for this task. (Later you can
arrange your tasks based on the importance of each
task.)
Ⅲ Status: Set whether the task is now completed.
Ⅲ Starts: Set when the task begins.
Ⅲ Due: Set the due date for the task.
Ⅲ Occurs: Set whether the task repeats at regular
intervals and how often it repeats.
Ⅲ Reminder: Set an alarm for this task and indicate when you want to be reminded.
250
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Ⅲ Categories: Assign the task to one or more categories.
Ⅲ Sensitivity: Mark this task as Normal, Personal, Private, or Confidential.
6. (Optional) Select the Notes tab and enter additional text for the task.
7. Press OK
.
You can also add a task by selecting the Tasks entry bar at the top of the
screen.
Tip
Checking Off a Task
1. From the Tasks list, highlight the task you want to check off.
(Overdue tasks appear in red.)
2. Press Complete
(left softkey).
You can also mark a task as completed by tapping the check box next to
the task on the Tasks list. If you need to mark a completed task as
incomplete, highlight it and press Activate (left softkey).
Tip
Organizing Your Tasks
1. In the Tasks list, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Filter.
2. Select which tasks you want to view: All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories,
Active Tasks, Completed Tasks, or a specific category, such as Business or Personal.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Sort By.
4. Select the sort method: Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date, or Due Date.
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
251
Deleting a Task
1. Highlight the task you want to delete.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete Task.
3. Select Yes.
Customizing Tasks
1. Go to the Tasks list.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
3. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Set reminders for new items: Automatically add a reminder to new tasks. (The
default reminder is set to 8:00 on the morning the task is due. You can override this
setting for individual tasks.)
Ⅲ Show start and due dates: Display the task start and due dates in the Tasks list.
Ⅲ Show Tasks entry bar: Display the Tasks entry bar at the top of the Tasks list.
4. Press OK
.
Notes
Notes are a great way to capture thoughts, questions, and meeting notes on your Treo.
To take advantage of all the sync features available in the Notes application,
make sure the desktop synchronization software is installed on your
for details.
Before You
Begin
252
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Creating a Note
1. Press Start
2. Select Notes
3. Press New
and select Programs.
.
(left softkey).
4. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Type the text with the keyboard.
Ⅲ Write the text with the stylus.
Ⅲ Enter the text by tapping the onscreen keyboard.
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey), select Draw, and then draw a sketch with the stylus,
crossing at least three ruled lines.
5. Press OK
.
You can add several voice notes within a single note.
Did you know?
Recording a Voice Note
You can create a new voice note or add a recording to an existing note.
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Notes
.
You can also press and hold the Side button to open the Notes application.
Tip
3. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ To add a recording to a note, open the note to which you want to add the recording.
Ⅲ To create a new voice note, press New
(left softkey).
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
253
4. If the recording toolbar is not visible at the bottom of the
screen, press Menu
(right softkey) and select View
Recording Toolbar.
5. Select
to begin recording.
6. Speak into the microphone on your Treo or hold it close to
another sound source.
7. After you finish recording, select
Recording icon appears in the note or in the Notes list,
depending on where you recorded the note.)
8. Press OK
to stop recording. (A
.
To play a recording, select the voice note in the Notes list or open the note
containing the recording and select the Recording icon.
Tip
Creating a Note From a Template
1. Go to the Notes list.
2. Tap the list in the upper-left corner, and select More Folders >Templates.
3. Open the template you want to use.
4. Enter the information.
5. Press OK
.
on page 255 for details.)
To create a new template, highlight the note you want to save as a template.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Rename/Move. Select Name and
then enter a name for the template. Select the Folder list and select
Templates. Press OK.
Tip
254
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Organizing Your Notes
You can rename your notes, move notes to another folder, and move notes between your Treo
and an expansion (storage) card.
1. Go to the Notes list and highlight a note you want to move.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Rename/Move.
3. Select Name and then enter a new name for the note.
4. Select Folder and then select the folder in which you want to store the note.
To create a new folder, go to the Notes list, select the list in the upper-left
corner, and then select Add/Delete. Select New, enter a name for
the folder, and then press OK.
Tip
5. Select Location and then select Main memory or Storage Card.
6. Press OK
.
7. Select the list in the upper-left corner, and then select the folder you want to view.
8. Select the list in the upper-right corner, and then select whether you want to sort your
notes by Name, Date, Size, or Type.
Deleting a Note
1. Go to the Notes list and highlight the note you want to delete.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete.
3. Select Yes.
Customizing Notes
1. Go to the Notes list.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
255
3. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Default mode: Set the default entry mode to Writing or Typing.
Ⅲ Default template: Set the default template for new notes.
Ⅲ Save to: Set the default location where new notes are stored.
Ⅲ Record button action: Set whether the Side button opens the Notes application or
stays in the current application.
4. Press OK
.
To use the Record button action feature, the Side button must be assigned
to open Notes. If you assigned the Side button to open another application,
Note
Calculator
You can use Calculator for basic arithmetic calculations, such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division.
You can tap the screen or use the keyboard to input numbers.
Performing Calculations
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Calculator
.
256
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
3. Enter numbers and perform calculations, including
the following:
Clear the last digit.
Clear the current calculation or the displayed number.
Calculate the reciprocal of a number.
Calculate a percentage.
Calculate the square root of a number.
Switch a number between negative and positive.
To copy a number, press Edit and select Copy. You can paste the copied
number into another application. To paste a copied number into another
Tip
application, press Edit and select Paste.
Using the Calculator Memory
ⅷ To store a number, select the box to the left of the entry box. (An M appears in the box.)
ⅷ To add the displayed number to the number stored in memory, select
ⅷ To display the number stored in memory, select
ⅷ To clear the memory, select
.
.
.
ⅷ When you store a number in memory, it replaces the number that was previously stored.
page 272 for details.
Tip
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
257
258
Section 5A: Using the Organizer Features
Synchronizing Microsoft® Office and Other Files
You can create and edit Microsoft® Office files on your computer or on your Palm® Treo™ 800W
smart device and then synchronize the files so that changes you make show up on both your
computer and your Treo. You can use the same method to synchronize files from other
applications that do not appear in the sync list, such as Microsoft® Outlook® Notes. (To learn
about synchronizing pictures, videos, and music, see “Synchronizing Your Media Files” on
page 205.) How synchronization happens, however, depends on whether you use Windows
XP or Windows Vista®.
Synchronizing Files: Windows XP
Install Microsoft® ActiveSync® desktop software from the Getting Started CD
Before You
Begin
1. Connect your Treo to your computer with the USB sync cable.
Most ActiveSync desktop software options are available only when your
Treo is connected to your computer.
Note
260
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
2. On your computer, double-click the
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer screen to
open the ActiveSync desktop software window. (If
you don’t see the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar,
click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync
to open the ActiveSync window.)
3. Under Information Type, double-click Files to view
a list of the files in the Files sync folder. (If you
don’t see the Files option, open the Tools menu,
select Options, and make sure the Files box is
checked.)
4. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ To copy a file from your computer to your Treo, click Add, browse to and highlight
the file, and then click Open.
Ⅲ To delete a file from the Files sync folder on your computer and from your Treo,
Ⅲ To copy a file from your device to your computer, place the file in the My Device >
My Documents folder on your device, and then sync.
If you receive an error message while synchronizing files, make sure that all
the files you’re trying to sync are closed on both your computer and your
Treo.
Note
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
261
Synchronizing Files: Windows Vista®
1. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ To copy a file from your computer to your device, copy or save the file in the
Documents\Documents on <device name’s> Device folder on your computer.
Ⅲ To copy a file from your device to your computer, copy or save the file in the
My Device > My Documents folder on your device.
2. Connect your Treo to your computer with the USB sync cable. (Synchronization takes
place automatically.)
The Documents on <device name’s> Device folder is created when you
select the option to sync files.
Did you know?
Where Are the Changes I Made to My File?
Don’t look for the changed file in its original location on your computer. Only the synchronized
version of the file contains the changes. To find the synchronized file, do one of the following:
Windows XP: Do either of the following:
ⅷ On your computer desktop, double-click the <device name> My Documents icon. This is a
shortcut to the Files sync folder.
ⅷ In ActiveSync desktop software, double-click Files. The location of the Files sync folder
appears in the File Synchronization Settings dialog box (under “On this computer,
synchronize the files in this folder”).
Windows Vista: Open the Documents\ Documents on <device name’s> Device folder.
On Your Treo: Press Start
and select File Explorer. Select the list in the upper-left corner
and select My Device > My Documents.
262
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Word Mobile
You can create and edit documents and templates and save them on your Treo. You can also
edit Microsoft® Office Word® documents and templates that you create on your computer.
However, keep in mind that some of the information and formatting may be lost when you
save the document on your Treo.
The following features are not supported in Word Mobile:
ⅷ Backgrounds.
ⅷ Picture bullets (regular bullets are supported).
ⅷ Revision marks (documents appear as though all revisions were accepted; if the
document is saved, revision marks are lost).
ⅷ Smart tags.
ⅷ Table styles (some or all of the formatting is lost if the document is saved).
ⅷ Password-protected files (remove password protection on your computer before opening
the file on your Treo).
ⅷ Digital signatures.
The following features are partially supported in Word Mobile:
ⅷ Bidirectional text.
ⅷ File conversions. (Files with Office 2003 extensions [DOC, DOT, and so on] cannot be
saved with Microsoft Office 2007 extensions [DOCX, DOTX, and so on], and vice versa.
However, you can save these file types as RTF and TXT files.)
ⅷ Legacy Pocket Word files (you can open PSW files, but if you edit a file, you need to save
it in DOC, RTF, TXT, or DOT format).
ⅷ Metafiles.
ⅷ Artistic page borders are converted to lined borders.
ⅷ IRM protection.
ⅷ Rights-managed and password-protected file conversions.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
263
ⅷ Fonts and font sizes (original fonts are listed on your Treo but are mapped to the closest
font available).
ⅷ Lists (indented lists are mapped to the closest indentation level supported by Word
Mobile).
ⅷ Underline styles (unsupported styles are mapped to one of the four supported styles:
regular, dotted, wavy, or thick/bold/wide).
The following features are not supported on your Treo, but they remain in the file so that when
you open the file on your computer, they appear as expected:
ⅷ Charts.
ⅷ Comments.
ⅷ Footnotes, endnotes, headers, footers.
ⅷ Page breaks (although undisplayed, all page breaks, except a break placed at the end of
a document, are retained in the document).
ⅷ SmartArt, shapes, and text boxes.
To copy a file from your computer to your Treo, open My Computer or
Windows Explorer on your computer, copy the file into the Mobile Device
folder. You can also use the Files sync folder to copy files from your
Tip
By default, files you create and edit in Word Mobile are saved in DOCX, RTF,
TXT, or DOTX format. However, you can change the settings to save files in
DOC, RTF, TXT, or DOT format.
Did you know?
264
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Creating a Document
1. Press Start
and select Office Mobile.
2. Select Word Mobile
.
3. If an empty document appears onscreen, go to step 4; if the document list appears
onscreen, press New (left softkey).
4. Enter the text of the document.
5. Press OK
to save the file.
When you save a new document, it is automatically named after the first
several words in the file.
Did you know?
Opening an Existing Document
1. Press Start
and select Office Mobile.
2. Select Word Mobile
.
3. In the document list, select the document you want to open.
Creating a Document From a Template
1. Go to the document list.
2. Tap the list in the upper-left corner, and select More Folders >Templates.
3. Open the template you want to use, and enter the information.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select File > Save As.
5. Select Name and enter a new name for the file.
6. Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the file.
7. Select the Type list, and then select the format in which you want to save the file.
8. Select the Location list, and then select Main Memory or Storage Card.
9. Select Save.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
265
To create a new template from a document, open the document you want
to save as a template. Press Menu (right softkey) and select File > Save As.
Select Name and then enter a name for the template. Select the Folder list
and select Templates. Select the Type list, and then select Word Template.
Press OK.
Tip
Finding or Replacing Text in a Document
1. Open the document containing the text you want to find.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Find/Replace.
3. Select Find what and enter the text you want to find.
4. (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in the
text you entered in step 3.
5. (Optional) Check the Match whole words only box to find only full words that match the
text you entered in step 3.
6. Select Find to locate the first instance of the text you entered in step 3, or select Replace
and enter the replacement text.
7. Select Next to find the next instance of the text, or select Replace to replace it.
(To replace all instances of the text, select Replace All.)
8. When you see a message indicating that the search is done, press OK
.
Moving or Copying Text
1. Open the document containing the text you want to move or copy.
2. Highlight the text you want to move or copy.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Copy to copy the text, or select Cut to move
the text.
4. Open the document where you want to insert the text, and position the insertion point
where you want the text to appear.
5. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Paste.
266
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
To zoom in or out, open a document, press View, select Zoom, and then
select the zoom level.
Tip
Saving a Copy of a Document
1. Open the document you want to copy.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select File > Save As.
3. Select Name and enter a new name for the file.
4. Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the file.
5. Select the Type list, and then select the format in which you want to save the file.
6. Select the Location list, and then select whether you want to store the file on your Treo or
on an expansion card.
7. Select Save.
Formatting Text
1. Open the document and highlight the text you want to format.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Format > Font.
3. Select any of the following formatting options: Font, Font color, Size, Bold, Italic,
Underline, Highlight, or Strikethrough.
4. Press OK
to return to the document.
If a document was previously saved on a computer, any unsupported
formatting may be lost when you save the file.
Note
Formatting Paragraphs and Lists
1. Open the document you want to format.
2. Position the insertion point in the paragraph you want to format.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Format > Paragraph.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
267
4. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Alignment: Align the text with the left, right, or center of the paragraph.
Ⅲ List: Create a bulleted or numbered list.
Ⅲ Indentation: Change the paragraph margins.
Ⅲ Left: Set the left margin for the entire paragraph.
Ⅲ Right: Set the right margin for the entire paragraph.
Ⅲ Special: Indent the first line or set a hanging indent.
Ⅲ By: Set the size of the Special indentation.
5. Press OK
to return to the document.
You can also use the Formatting toolbar to create a list and to align text. To
indent text in lists, you must use the Formatting toolbar.
Tip
Checking Spelling in a Document
1. Open the document you want to check.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Spelling.
3. If an unknown or misspelled word is encountered, do one of the following:
Ⅲ Select the correct word in the list if the word is spelled incorrectly.
Ⅲ Select Ignore if the word is spelled correctly.
Ⅲ Select Add to add a new word to the spelling dictionary.
To check the spelling of specific text, highlight it before you select the
Spelling command.
Tip
268
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Organizing Your Documents
You can rename your documents, move your documents to another folder, and move your
documents between your Treo and an expansion (storage) card.
1. Go to the documents list.
2. Highlight a file.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Rename/Move.
4. Select Name and then enter a new name for the document.
5. Select the Folder list, and then select the folder you want to move the document to.
To create a new folder, go to the documents list, select the list in the
upper-left corner, and then select Add/Delete. Select New, enter a name for
the folder, and then press OK.
Tip
6. Select the Location list, and then select Main memory or Storage card.
7. Press OK
.
8. Select the list in the upper-left corner, and then select the folder you want to view.
9. Select the list in the upper-right corner, and then select the sort method.
When you go to a folder, you can easily search your documents by sorting
by type.
Tip
Deleting a Document
1. Go to the documents list.
2. Highlight the document you want to delete.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Delete.
4. Select Yes.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
269
Customizing Word Mobile
1. Go to the document list.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
3. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Default template: Set the default template for new documents.
Ⅲ Save to: Set the default location where new documents are stored.
Ⅲ Display in list view: Set the types of files that appear in the documents list.
4. Press OK
.
PowerPoint® Mobile
With Microsoft® PowerPoint® Mobile, you can open and view slide show presentations created
on your computer. Many presentation elements such as slide transitions, animations, and URL
links are also supported. Microsoft® PowerPoint® features that are not supported on your Treo
include the following:
ⅷ Custom animations and transitions.
ⅷ SmartArt layouts are replaced with supported layouts.
ⅷ Text boxes, images, and shapes that use the Reflection, Glow, Bevel, 3E Rotation, and
Transform effects.
ⅷ WordArt styles and text effects.
ⅷ Fonts and font sizes not supported by your Treo.
ⅷ Audio/video content (embedded WAV files are supported).
ⅷ Protection settings.
ⅷ Rearrangement or editing of slides.
ⅷ Files created in PPT format earlier than Microsoft PowerPoint 97.
270
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
To copy a file from your computer to your Treo, open My Computer or
Windows Explorer on your computer, copy the file into the Mobile Device
folder, and then sync.
Tip
Playing a Presentation
1. Press Start
and select Office Mobile.
2. Select PowerPoint Mobile
.
3. In the presentation list, highlight the presentation you want to play.
4. Press Center and do any of the following:
Ⅲ Press Right to advance to the next slide, or Left to view the previous slide.
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey), select Go to Slide, and then select the slide you
want to view.
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey), and select Next or Previous to play animations.
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey), select Zoom In, and then select
to zoom in or
to zoom out. (To scroll within the current slide, tap and drag the slide. To return to
the slide show, select .)
Ⅲ Press Menu
(right softkey), and select End Show.
If a presentation is set up as a timed slide show, the slides advance
automatically. Presentations pause during zooming.
Tip
Setting Presentation Playback Options
1. Open the presentation for which you want to change the settings.
2. Press Center
and select Show Options.
3. On the Orientation tab, select the orientation you want. (To select the orientation that
best fits the screen on your Treo, select Default.)
4. Select the Playback tab, and check the Override playback options for all files box.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
271
5. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Show without animation: Turn off builds and other animations.
Ⅲ Show without slide transition: Turn off transition effects between slides.
Ⅲ Use timings, if present: Enable the timings recorded with each slide in a
presentation.
Ⅲ Loop continuously: Advance to the first slide after playing the last slide in a
presentation.
Ⅲ Show without media: Turn off sound and other media effects.
6. Press OK
.
To turn the presentation into a continuously looping slide show, check both
the Use timings, if present, and the Loop continuously boxes.
Tip
Excel® Mobile
With Microsoft® Excel® Mobile you can create and edit workbooks and templates on your Treo.
You can also edit workbooks and templates that you create on your computer. However, keep
in mind that you may lose some of the information and formatting when you save the
workbook on your Treo.
To copy a file from your computer to your Treo, open My Computer or
Windows Explorer on your computer, copy the file into the Mobile Device
folder, and then sync.
Tip
Note the following formatting considerations:
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Alignment: Vertical text appears horizontal.
Artistic borders: Appear as a single line.
Cell patterns: Patterns applied to cells are removed.
272
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Fonts and font sizes: The original font is listed on your Treo and is mapped to the closest
font available. Original fonts reappear on your computer.
Number formats: Microsoft® Excel® 97 conditional formatting is displayed in number
format.
Formulas and functions: Unsupported functions are removed, and only the returned value
of the function appears. Formulas containing the following are also converted to values:
Ⅲ More than 512 bytes
Ⅲ An array or array argument, for example, =SUM({1;2;3;4}).
Ⅲ External link references or an intersection range reference.
Ⅲ References past row 16384 are replaced with #REF!.
Tip
ⅷ
Protection settings: Most protection features are disabled but are not removed. You must
remove the password protection in Microsoft® Office Excel® on your computer before
editing the file on your Treo. Rights-managed and password-protected files must be saved
only in their original file format.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Zoom settings: Worksheet-specific zoom settings are not retained. The zoom setting
applies to the entire workbook.
Worksheet names: Names that refer to other workbooks, arrays, array formulas, or
intersection ranges are removed from the name list, causing those formulas to be
resolved as “#NAME?” All hidden names are not hidden.
ⅷ
ⅷ
AutoFilter Settings: AutoFilters that cause rows to be hidden are supported. Use the
Unhide command to display hidden rows. Other AutoFilters are removed, but you can use
the AutoFilter command in Excel Mobile to perform similar functions.
Chart Formatting: All charts are saved as they appear in Excel Mobile. Unsupported chart
types are changed to one of these supported types: Column, Bar, Line, Pie, Scatter, and
Area. Background colors, grid lines, data labels, trend lines, shadows, 3D effects,
secondary axes, and logarithmic scales are turned off.
ⅷ
Hidden sheets. Hidden worksheets are displayed.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
273
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Excel 2007 Binary workbooks. You cannot open XLSB workbooks.
Legacy files. PXL and PXT files can be opened, but must be saved in XLS or XLT format.
File conversions. You cannot save a file with an XLS or XLT extension as an XLSX or XLTX
file, respectively, and vice versa.
The following features are not supported in Excel Mobile and are removed or modified when
you open a workbook on your Treo:
ⅷ Dialog sheets and macro sheets.
ⅷ VBA modules.
ⅷ Text boxes.
ⅷ Drawing objects and pictures.
ⅷ Lists.
ⅷ Conditional formats and controls.
ⅷ Pivot table data (is converted to values).
Creating a Workbook
1. Press Start
2. Select Excel Mobile
3. If an empty workbook appears onscreen, go to step 4; if the workbook list appears
onscreen, press New (left softkey).
4. Highlight a cell where you want to enter text or other information.
and select Office Mobile.
.
5. Enter the information in the cell, and then press Return
.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the remaining information.
7. Press OK
to save the file.
274
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
When you save a new workbook, it is automatically named BookX (where X
is the next number in a sequence) and then placed in the workbook list.
Tip
To insert a symbol, place the insertion point where you want the symbol.
Press Menu (right softkey) and select Insert > Symbol. Highlight the
symbol you want to insert, and then select Insert.
Creating a Workbook From a Template
1. Go to the workbook list.
2. Select the list in the upper-left corner, select More Folders > Templates.
3. Open the template you want to use, and enter the information you want to include in the
template.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select File > Save As.
5. Select Name and enter a new name for the workbook.
6. Select the Folder list, and then select the folder where you want to save the workbook.
7. Select the Type list, and select Excel 2007 Workbook.
8. Select Save.
To create a new template from a workbook, open the workbook you want to
save as a template. Press Menu (right softkey) and select File>Save As.
Select Name and then enter a name for the template. Select the Folders list
and select Templates. Select Type and select Excel 2007 Template. Press
OK.
Tip
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
275
Viewing a Workbook
1. Press Start
and select Office Mobile.
2. Select Excel Mobile
.
3. In the workbook list, select the workbook you want to view.
4. Press View (left softkey) and then select any of the following:
Ⅲ Full Screen: View as much data as possible on the screen. To return to the normal
view, select Restore in the upper-right corner.
Ⅲ Zoom: Set the magnification level so that you can easily read the worksheet.
Ⅲ Sheet: Switch to a different worksheet.
Ⅲ Split: Divide the window into two scrollable areas. To move the split bar, tap and
drag it. To remove the split bar, select View > Remove Split.
Ⅲ Freeze Panes: Lock rows or columns so that they remain visible while you scroll.
Highlight the cell at the juncture you want to lock before you select this command.
To unlock the rows or columns, select View > Unfreeze Panes.
Ⅲ Toolbar: Set whether the toolbar appears onscreen.
Ⅲ Status Bar: Set whether the status bar appears onscreen.
Ⅲ Show: Set whether headings and scroll bars appear onscreen.
To jump to a cell or region, press Menu (right softkey) and select Edit > Go
To. Select Cell reference or name and enter the target cell information or
select Current region. Select OK.
Tip
You can switch worksheets by selecting the sheet list at the bottom of the
screen.
Did you know?
276
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Calculating a Sum
1. Press View
(left softkey) and select Toolbar.
2. Highlight the cell where you want to insert the sum.
3. Select Sum
4. Tap and drag the stylus across the cells you want to add.
5. Press Return
.
.
Entering a Formula
1. Highlight the cell where you want to enter the formula.
2. Enter an equal (=) sign followed by any values, cell references, name references,
operators, and functions. Example: =(B4/25)+100=Revenue-Expenses
3. Press Return
.
Inserting a Function
1. Highlight the cell where you want to insert the function.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Insert >
Function.
3. Select the Category list, and then select the type of function
you want to insert.
4. Select the Function list, and then select the specific function
you want to insert.
5. Select OK.
To enter symbols that are not on the keyboard, such as the = sign, press Alt
and select the symbol from the list.
Did you know?
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
277
Entering a Sequence Automatically
1. Highlight both the cells containing the information you want
to automate and the adjacent destination cells.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Fill.
3. Select the Direction list, and then select the direction you
want to populate.
4. Select the Fill type list, and then select Series.
5. Select the Series type list, and then select the type of series
you want. If you select Date or Number, enter a Step value
increment.
6. Select OK.
Select Autofill as the series type to quickly fill cells with repetitive data such
Tip
as numbers or repeated text. Autofill takes the content of the first cell in the
highlighted row or column and copies it down or across the rest of the
selection.
Adding Cells, Rows, and Columns
1. Open the workbook you want to add to.
2. Highlight the area where you want to insert elements.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Insert > Cells.
4. Select how you want to insert the elements:
Ⅲ Shift cells right: Insert a new cell. The highlighted cell and all cells on the right move
one column to the right.
Ⅲ Shift cells down: Insert a new cell. The highlighted cell and all cells below it move
down.
Ⅲ Entire row: Insert a new row. The entire row in which the highlighted cell is located
and all rows below it move down.
278
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
Ⅲ Entire column: Insert a new column. The entire column in which the highlighted
cells are located and all columns to the right move one column to the right.
5. Select OK.
To add a new worksheet, press Menu (right softkey) and select Format >
Modify Sheets. Select Insert, enter a name for the worksheet, and then
press OK. To change the order of the worksheets, highlight a worksheet
you want to move, and then select Move Up or Move Down. Press OK.
Tip
Formatting Cells
1. Open the workbook you want to format.
2. Highlight the cells you want to format.
To name the highlighted cell or range of cells, press Menu (right softkey)
and select Insert > Define Name. Enter the name and select Add. Press
Tip
OK.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Format > Cells.
4. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ Size: Set the row height and column width.
Ⅲ Number: Set the format for the numbers in the cells.
Ⅲ Align: Set whether text wraps within the highlighted cells, and set the horizontal and
vertical alignment position.
Ⅲ Font: Set the typeface, color, size, and style attributes.
Ⅲ Borders: Turn borders on and off for various cell edges, and set the border and
background colors.
5. Press OK
.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
279
Formatting Rows and Columns
1. Open the workbook you want to format.
2. Highlight the rows or columns you want to format.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and then select Format > Row or Format > Column.
4. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ AutoFit: Adjust the size of the highlighted rows or columns to their contents.
Ⅲ Hide: Hide the highlighted rows or columns.
Ⅲ Unhide: Display hidden rows or columns in the highlighted area.
You can adjust the column or row size by tapping and dragging the right
edge of the column header or the bottom edge of the row header. To
automatically fit rows and columns to their contents, double-tap the lower
edge of the row heading or the right edge of the column heading.
Did you know?
Renaming a Worksheet
1. Open the workbook containing the worksheet you want to rename.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Format > Modify Sheets.
3. In the Sheets list, highlight the worksheet you want to rename.
4. Select Rename, enter a new name for the worksheet, and then press OK
twice.
Sorting Information in a Worksheet
1. Highlight the cells you want to sort.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > Sort.
3. Select the Sort by list, and then select the primary sort column.
4. Check or uncheck the Ascending box to indicate whether you want to sort in ascending
or descending order.
5. (Optional) Select the Then by lists, and then select second- and third-level sorting
options.
280
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
6. Check or uncheck the Exclude header row from sort box to indicate if you want to sort
the header row.
7. Select OK.
Filtering Information in a Worksheet
1. Highlight the cells that contain the information you want to filter.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Tools > AutoFilter. (A list appears at the top
of each related column).
3. Select one of the new lists, and then select a filter. (This hides all rows that do not
include the selected filter.)
4. (Optional) Select the other lists, and then select other filters.
To display all rows again, select the filter list and then select All. To turn off
filtering, press Menu (right softkey) and select Tools > AutoFilter again.
Tip
You can also create custom filters where you specify comparisons. Select
the filter list, and then select Custom.
Did you know?
Creating a Chart
1. Open the workbook you want to create a chart from.
2. Highlight the cells you want to include in the chart.
3. Press Menu
4. Select the type of chart, and then press Next
5. Confirm the data range you want to chart, and then press Next
6. Select the data layout, and then press Next (right softkey).
(right softkey) and select Insert > Chart.
(right softkey).
(right softkey).
7. Check the boxes to indicate whether the first row and column of the data range
represent labels.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
281
8. Select whether you want the chart to appear as a separate worksheet within the current
workbook, or as part of the current worksheet.
9. Press Finish
(right softkey).
Formatting or Changing a Chart
1. Open the workbook that contains the chart you want to format.
2. Open the chart.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Format > Chart.
4. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ Titles: Set the title of the chart and the headings, whether a legend appears, and the
placement of the legend.
Ⅲ Scale: Set the minimum and maximum scales for charts with an x or y axis.
Ⅲ Type: Set the chart style. You can use this setting to convert your chart to a different
format.
Ⅲ Series: Add, modify, format, or delete related data points without affecting the
information in your worksheet.
5. Press OK
.
Finding or Replacing Information in a Workbook
1. Open the workbook containing the information you want to find.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Find/Replace.
3. Select Find what and enter the information you want to find.
4. (Optional) Check the Match case box to find text that matches the capitalization in any
text you entered.
5. (Optional) Check the Match entire cells box to find only full words that match any text
you entered.
6. Select Find to locate the first instance of the information you entered, or select Replace
and enter the replacement information.
282
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
7. Select Next to find the next instance of the information, or select Replace to replace it.
(To replace all instances of the information, select Replace All.)
8. When you see a message indicating that the search is done, press OK
.
Organizing Your Workbooks
You can rename your workbooks and move them to another folder and between your Treo
and an expansion (storage) card.
1. Go to the workbook list.
2. Highlight a file.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Rename/Move.
4. Select Name and then enter a new name for the workbook.
5. Select the Folder list, and then select the folder you want to move the workbook to.
6. Select the Location list, and then select Main memory or Storage card.
7. Press OK
.
8. Select the list in the upper-left corner, and then select the folder you want to view.
9. Select the list in the upper-right corner, and then select the sort method.
When you go to a folder, you can easily search your documents by sorting
by type.
Tip
Deleting Cells, Rows, and Columns
1. Open the workbook containing the elements you want to delete.
2. Highlight the area you want to delete.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Delete Cells.
4. Select how you want to remove the elements:
Ⅲ Shift cells left: Delete the highlighted cells and moves all cells on the right one
column to the left.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
283
Ⅲ Shift cells up: Delete the highlighted cells and moves all cells below them up.
Ⅲ Entire row: Delete the entire row in which the highlighted cells are located, and
moves all rows below it up.
Ⅲ Entire column: Delete the entire column in which the highlighted cells are located,
and moves all columns on the right one column to the left.
5. Press OK
.
Excel Mobile adjusts formulas to reflect the new cell locations. However, a
formula that refers to a deleted cell displays the #REF! error value.
Did you know?
To delete a workbook, go to the workbook list and highlight the workbook
you want to delete. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Delete. Select Yes
to confirm.
Tip
To delete a worksheet, open the workbook that contains the worksheet you
want to delete. Press Menu (right softkey) and select Format > Modify
Sheets. Highlight the worksheet you want to delete, and then select Delete.
Select Yes to confirm the deletion, and then press OK.
Customizing Excel Mobile
1. Go to the workbook list.
2. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
3. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Template for new workbook: Set the default template for new workbooks.
Ⅲ Save new workbooks to: Set where new workbooks are stored.
Ⅲ Files to display in list view: Set which types of files appear in the workbook list.
4. Press OK
.
284
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
OneNote® Mobile
OneNote® Mobile lets you create digital notes that contain text, pictures, and audio and video.
You can then synchronize these notes with Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 on your computer.
During synchronization, all the notes you create on your Treo are copied to a notebook called
OneNote Mobile on your computer; you can then drag your notes to other locations on your
computer. You can use OneNote Mobile to do any of the following:
ⅷ Take pictures of business cards and then insert them into OneNote.
ⅷ Take pictures of flip charts and whiteboards in conference rooms and then insert them
into OneNote.
ⅷ Enter text and insert voice recordings (for example, reminders of important events, ideas
for projects, price comparisons, recommendations, blog ideas, and so on) and
synchronize them with your notes.
ⅷ Prepare meeting or travel information in OneNote on your computer and then transfer it to
your Treo so you can access the information on the road.
Creating a New Note
Just like in Office OneNote 2007 on your computer, OneNote Mobile continuously saves your
note as you create, edit, and close a note.
1. Press Start
2. Select OneNote Mobile
3. Press New (left softkey).
and select Office Mobile.
.
4. Enter your note text.
5. (Optional) Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Format text: Place the cursor in the middle of the word that you want to format,
press Menu
(right softkey), select Format, and select a style. To clear all
formatting for the selected text, press Menu
(right softkey), and select Format >
Clear All.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
285
Ⅲ Create a numbered list: Place the cursor where you want the list to begin, press
Menu (right softkey), and select List > Numbered. To clear the numbered list
formatting, place the cursor on any list item, press Menu
(right softkey), and
select List > Clear.
Ⅲ Create a bulleted list: Place the cursor where you want the list to begin, press Menu
(right softkey), and select List > Bulleted. To clear the bulleted list formatting,
place the cursor on any list item, press Menu
(right softkey), and select List >
Clear.
Ⅲ Create a hyperlink: Enter the Web site address for which you want to create the
hyperlink. For example, to create a hyperlink to the Microsoft Web site, type
http://www.microsoft.com.
Ⅲ Insert a new picture: Press Menu
(right softkey), select Take Picture, press
Center
to take the picture, and then press OK to insert it into your note.
Ⅲ Insert an existing picture: Press Menu
(right softkey), select Insert Picture, and
then select the picture to insert it into your note.
Ⅲ Insert a voice note: Press Menu (right softkey), select Insert Recording, and
then select Record to begin recording. After you finish recording, select Stop
6. Press Done (left softkey). (The first line of text in the note becomes the note name.
You can rename the note later.)
.
While taking notes, you can undo a mistake by pressing Menu (right
softkey) and selecting Undo.
Tip
Viewing or Editing an Existing Note
1. Press Start
2. Select OneNote Mobile
3. In the OneNote Mobile list, select the note that you want to open.
and select Office Mobile.
.
286
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
4. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Open a hyperlink: Place the cursor anywhere in the link, and then press Center
.
Ⅲ View picture detail: Highlight the picture, press Center
softkey), and then select Zoom In. To zoom in further, press Menu
softkey) and select Zoom In again. Use the 5-way to view different parts of the
picture. To zoom out, press Menu (right softkey) and select Zoom Out; you can
also select Actual Size or Fit to Screen. To close the picture, press OK
, press Menu
(right
(right
.
Ⅲ Play a voice note: Highlight the voice note and press Center
. To close the voice
note, press OK
5. Press Done
(left softkey) to close the note.
Renaming a Note
1. In the OneNote Mobile list, select the note that you want to rename.
2. Press Menu (right softkey) and then select Rename.
3. Enter the new name.
4. Press Done
(left softkey) to accept the new name.
Sorting your Notes
1. From the OneNote Mobile list, press Menu
(right softkey), and then select Options.
2. Select the method you want to use to sort your notes: Name or Date modified.
3. Press Done
(left softkey) to sort your notes.
Deleting a Note
1. In the OneNote Mobile list, select the note that you want to delete.
2. Press Menu (right softkey) and then select Delete.
3. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
287
PDF Viewer
Picsel PDF Viewer lets you view PDF files whether they are saved to your Treo, attached to
email messages, stored on an expansion card that is inserted into the expansion card slot on
your Treo, or downloaded from the Web. You can customize the document display.
You can use the Files sync folder to transfer PDF files between your
computer and your Treo. The process is the same as transferring Microsoft
page 260 for details.
Did you know?
Opening a File
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select PDF Viewer
.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to open.
4. Select the file you want.
5. (Optional) Optimize your viewing of the file by doing any of
the following:
Ⅲ To switch between zoom mode and pan mode, press
Center
Ⅲ To zoom in and out while viewing the PDF file, press
Up or Down while in zoom mode.
Ⅲ To pan the display in a given direction, press Right
Left , Up , or Down while in pan mode.
.
,
Ⅲ To rotate the displayed page, press Menu
(right
softkey) and select Page > Rotate.
288
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
To see which mode you are in, press Show Mode (left softkey) to display
the mode icon. Press Hide Mode (left softkey) to hide the mode icon.
Tip
To quickly find the file you want, select the <folder name>, Date, or Size
column heading to sort the displayed files by that heading.
To open a file you have recently opened, open PDF Viewer, press Menu
(right softkey), and then select Recent > [the name of the file you want].
Moving Around in PDF files
To move around within a PDF file, do either of the following:
ⅷ To go to the next or previous page in the file, press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Page > Next Page or Page > Previous Page.
ⅷ To go to the first or last page in the file, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Page >
First page or Page > Last page.
Customizing the Display
You can choose between two views for displaying PDF files. You can also hide the toolbar to
view the file on the full screen.
1. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Page.
2. Select one of the following options:
Ⅲ Fit to width: Set the width of the file to match the width of the screen; you may need
to scroll up or down to view the entire document.
Ⅲ Fit to page: Set the entire file—both width and height—to fit on one screen.
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
289
Customizing PDF Viewer
1. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Settings.
2. Select any of the following options:
Ⅲ Clear History: Delete all files from the Recent list, which shows the four most
recently viewed files.
Ⅲ Files: Set which file types can be opened with PDF Viewer.
Ⅲ About: View information on the PDF Viewer application.
290
Section 5B: Increasing Your Productivity
292
Finding Information
You can find information quickly with the built-in search and GPS features on your Palm®
Treo™ 800W smart device:
ⅷ
Lookup: Find and dial your contacts by contact name, company name, or phone number.
page 79 for details.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Search: Look through the text in all the applications on your Treo.
File Explorer: Browse through the files and folders on your Treo or on an expansion card.
Global Address Lookup: Look up names in your online corporate address list.
Web From Your Today Screen” on page 179 for details.)
ⅷ
page 182 for details.)
Using Search
Search for files and other items stored in the My Documents folder on your Treo or on an
expansion card. You can search by file name or by words located in the item. For example,
you can search for words within notes, appointments, contacts, and tasks.
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select Search
.
3. Select Search for, and then enter the file name, word, or
other information you want to find.
4. Select the Type list, and then select the kind of information
you want to find.
5. Press Search
(left softkey).
6. Use the 5-way to select and view an item from the results of
the search.
294
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
To find an item you’ve looked for before, select the Search for list and then
select the item in the list.
Tip
You can also open the Search screen by pressing Option + Shift.
Did you know?
Exploring Files and Folders
You can use File Explorer to browse the contents of folders on your Treo or an expansion card
(sold separately). The root folder on your Treo is named My Device. My Device is similar to My
Computer (Windows XP) or Computer (Windows Vista®) on your computer.
1. Press Start
and select File Explorer.
2. Tap the list in the upper-left corner, and then select the folder you want to explore.
You can sort the contents of a folder by name, date, size, or type. Select the
list in the upper-right corner, and then select the sort method.
Did you know?
3. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ To open an item, select it.
Ⅲ To decompress a ZIP file, tap it.
To compress files, you must use a decompression program, such as WinZip,
on your computer. You cannot compress files on your Treo.
Note
Ⅲ To quickly delete, rename, beam, or email an item, highlight the item, press and
hold Center
to open the shortcut menu, and then select the appropriate
command.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
295
Do not delete any files that you cannot identify. These files may be required
for your Treo to function properly.
Important
Ⅲ To move or copy a file to another folder, highlight the item, press and hold
Center to open the shortcut menu, and then select Cut or Copy. Open the
destination folder, press and hold Center
to open the shortcut menu, and then
select Paste.
Ⅲ To highlight multiple items, tap and drag the stylus.
Installing Applications
Your Treo comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. You can also install any
of the additional software included on the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart
device, as well as other third-party applications that are compatible with devices running
Microsoft® Windows Mobile® 6.1 Professional edition, such as business software, games, and
more.
Applications you download to your computer are likely to be in a compressed format, such as
ZIP. If the file is compressed, you need to decompress the file before you install the
application on your device. You can decompress the file on your Treo in File Explorer or on
your computer in a decompression program, such as WinZip.
You can also send the file to yourself as an email attachment and then open
the email message on your Treo, and tap the attachment to automatically
decompress the file.
Did you know?
The following instructions tell you how to install basic files onto your Treo. Some software uses
an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation
that came with the software.
296
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
If an application does not have a Microsoft Mobile to Market certificate, a
message appears indicating that the application is untrusted. If this occurs,
you can indicate whether you want to continue the installation.
Tip
Be sure to select and install applications that are compatible with Windows
Mobile 6.1 Professional. Applications that are designed for other versions of
Windows Mobile may not be compatible with your Treo.
Installing Bonus Software From the CD
The Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device includes several bonus software
applications that you can install on your Treo. You can install these applications when you
install the desktop software, or you can install them later.
1. Insert the Getting Started CD into the CD drive on your computer.
2. Click Bonus Software.
3. Click the name of the application you want to install.
4. Click Install (on the right side of the screen).
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications.
6. Synchronize your Treo with your computer to install the application(s) on your device.
Purchasing Applications From the Sprint Mobile Software Store
You can use Software Store to purchase and install applications directly from the Sprint
Mobile Software Store Web site onto your Treo.
2. Press Start
and select Programs.
3. Select Software Store
.
4. Select a category link.
5. Select the Buy Now link below the item you want to purchase.
6. Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the transaction.
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
297
Installing Applications From Other Web Sites on the Internet
You can use Internet Explorer® Mobile to install Windows Mobile applications in the CAB file
format directly from the Internet. For files in the ZIP file format, you must unzip the files in File
Explorer before you install them. For files in any format other than CAB or ZIP, you must first
download the files to your computer and then install them to your Treo by synchronizing.
2. Press Start
and select Internet Explorer.
3. Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download.
4. Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center
to start
the download process.
5. If prompted, select the folder where you want to store the file.
6. When the download is complete, press Start
and select File Explorer.
7. Go to the folder you selected in step 5.
8. Select the file you downloaded to start the installation program.
Installing Applications From Your Computer
There are many applications available for your Treo. To get started, check out the selection at
To install an application from your computer, you must first install the
desktop sync software on your computer (see “Setting Up Your Computer
Before You
Begin
1. On your computer, open My Computer or Windows Explorer (Windows XP) or Computer
(Windows Vista).
2. Copy the application file(s) into the
Mobile Device folder.
3. Connect your Treo to your computer to synchronize and install the application(s) on
your device.
298
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Installing Applications Onto an Expansion Card
2. Connect your Treo to your computer.
3. On your computer, open the ActiveSync® window (Windows XP) or Windows Mobile
Device Center (Windows Vista).
4. Click Explore
.
5. Double-click My Windows Mobile-Based Device
to open the Mobile Device folder.
6. Copy the application file(s) into the Storage Card folder inside the Mobile Device folder.
Getting Help With Third-Party Applications
If you encounter a problem, such as an error message, with a third-party application, contact
the application’s author or vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party applications, see
Make sure that the third-party application supports 320 x 320 screen resolution. Some older
applications have screen-size limitations. Third-party applications should also be written for
Windows Mobile version 6.1 or later. Programs written for earlier versions may not support
5-way navigation or softkeys and can have performance problems.
Before purchasing a third-party program, try the free version (if available) to
make sure the program works properly with Windows Mobile 6.1 and your
Treo.
Tip
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
299
Removing Applications
To free up storage space on your Treo, you can remove
applications that you no longer use. You can remove only
applications, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot
remove the built-in applications that reside in the
Read-Only-Memory (ROM) portion of your device.
1. Press Start
2. Select the System tab, and then select Remove
Programs
and select Settings.
.
3. Highlight the application that you want to remove.
4. Select Remove.
5. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Some applications are factory-installed on your Treo and cannot be deleted.
These are not included on the Remove Programs list.
Tip
Sharing Information
Your Treo comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing information, so that you can
choose the quickest, most convenient way to send your information or to receive information
from another device.
ⅷ When you have a file open in a program such as Notes or Pictures & Videos you can
easily share this file by pressing Menu
(right softkey) and then selecting either
Beam, File > Send via, Tools > Send, or Tools > Beam.
ⅷ When you’re viewing a list of files, such as the Notes list or PowerPoint® Mobile list, you
can share a file by highlighting the file in the list, pressing Menu
(right softkey), and
then selecting Send via or Beam File.
300
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
ⅷ In the Inbox application, you can insert a picture or attach a note or other file to an email.
You can also receive pictures and attachments.
ⅷ You can synchronize to share files with your computer. (You can add or remove files
directly from the <device name> My Documents folder, located in your My Documents
directory on your computer. These files are updated the next time you sync.)
ⅷ You can beam files and applications between your Treo and the device of someone near
you, using the IR port or Bluetooth® wireless technology.
ⅷ You can also store files on an expansion card and share the expansion card.
Using Expansion Cards
The expansion card slot on your Treo enables you to add microSD cards and microSDHC
cards to extend the storage capacity of your device. (Expansion cards are sold separately.)
For example, expansion cards can store the following, and more:
ⅷ Documents (Office, text, and PDF)
ⅷ Email attachments
ⅷ Pictures
ⅷ Videos
ⅷ Audio and music files
ⅷ Games
ⅷ Applications
We recommend that you purchase preformatted expansion cards. To format
a card on your own, you need to connect a card reader (sold separately) to
your computer.
Tip
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
301
Inserting and Removing Expansion Cards
1. Open the door to the expansion card slot by lifting the left edge of the door and then
rotating the door downward.
2. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ To insert an expansion card, hold your Treo with the screen facing you and the card
with the label facing you, and then insert the card into the expansion card slot until
you feel it lock into place. (The contacts on the card should be facing away from
you.)
Ⅲ To remove an expansion card, press the card into the expansion card slot until it is
released from the slot.
Your Treo has a push-push mechanism: push in gently to insert a card; push
in gently to remove it.
Tip
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when
you insert or remove an expansion card.
Opening Applications on an Expansion Card
After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can open any of the
applications stored on the expansion card.
302
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Press Start and select File Explorer.
3. Select the list in the upper-left corner, and then select Storage Card.
4. Select the application you want to open.
To run an application on an expansion card, your Treo must have enough
free space in the internal memory.
Tip
Saving Files to an Expansion Card
You can save space on your Treo by saving files to an expansion card. For example, when
you create new Word Mobile documents, notes, Excel® Mobile workbooks, pictures, videos,
and audio files, you can save them directly to an expansion card. (Some applications may not
support this feature.)
1. Insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Open the application that contains the information you want to save.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options or Tools (depending on the
application).
4. Select the Save to list, and then select Storage Card.
5. Press OK
.
If you don’t see the Save to list on the Options screen, look on the other
tabs (if present). If you still can’t find a Save to list, the application may not
support this feature.
Tip
You can create folders on your expansion card so that it’s easy to find your
files when you need them.
Did you know?
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
303
Moving Information Between Your Treo and an Expansion Card
1. Insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Open the application that contains the information you want to move.
3. Go to the list view and highlight the item(s) you want to move.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Rename/Move.
5. Select the Location list, and then select where you want to move the information:
Storage Card or Main Memory.
6. Press OK
.
Copying or Moving Applications and Files Between Your Treo and an
Expansion Card
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Press Start
and select File Explorer.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut.
5. Go to the folder where you want to place the selected item.
6. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Edit > Paste.
7. Press OK
.
Your applications are usually located in the My Device/Program Files folder.
Tip
Viewing Available Expansion Card Memory
You can view how much space is available on the expansion card that is currently in the
expansion card slot.
304
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Press Start and select Settings.
3. Select the System tab, and then select Memory
4. Select the Storage Card tab.
.
5. After you finish viewing the information, press OK
.
Exploring Files on an Expansion Card
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Press Start and select File Explorer.
3. Tap the list in the upper-left corner, and then select Storage Card.
4. Select the folder or files you want to view.
5. After you finish viewing the information, press OK
.
Renaming Files on an Expansion Card
If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point want to rename the
files or folders to better match their contents.
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Press Start
and select File Explorer.
3. Tap the list in the upper-left corner, and then select My Device.
4. Highlight the file or folder you want to rename.
5. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Rename.
6. Enter the new name, and then press Center
.
7. Press OK
.
Before copying information to or renaming the files or folders on an
expansion card, make sure the card is not write-protected. For details, see
the instructions that came with your card.
Tip
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
305
Encrypting an Expansion Card
When you encrypt an expansion card, the info on the card can be read only by your Treo—so
no one can see what’s on the card if it is lost or stolen.
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.
2. Press Start
and select Settings.
3. Select the System tab, and then select Encryption
.
4. Check the Encrypt files placed on storage cards box.
If your organization enforces an encryption policy, you can see that the box
is checked but you cannot uncheck it.
Note
306
Section 6A: Managing Files and Applications
Section 6B
Synchronizing Information
In This Section
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ When you synchronize, the information you enter on your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device,
your computer, or your corporate server is automatically updated in the other location. There’s
no need to enter the information twice. This is true whether you sync with your computer
using desktop synchronization software (see “Setting Up Your Computer for Synchronization”
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
307
Setting Up Wireless Synchronization
If your company uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded
to Service Pack 2, you may be able to take advantage of Microsoft Direct Push technology.
Direct Push technology is a two-way wireless delivery method that keeps your Microsoft®
Outlook® information up-to-date by providing efficient communication between the server and
your Treo. You may also have access to other features such as Global Address List; Tasks
Over The Air (OTA); and IP-based push updating of Calendar, Tasks, and Inbox.
Because your desktop copy of Outlook also syncs with the server, whatever
syncs to the server from your Treo also shows up in Outlook; and whatever
you enter or change in Outlook on your computer syncs to the server and
then shows up on your Treo.
Did you know?
If you installed ActiveSync desktop software on a Windows XP computer,
you may have already set up your Treo to synchronize wirelessly with the
server. To check, on your Treo, press Start, select Programs, and then
select ActiveSync. Press Menu (right softkey). If Configure Server appears
instead of Add Server Source, wireless sync is already set up, and you can
skip this procedure.
Before You
Begin
1. Work with your system administrator to gather the following information for your
Exchange Server account:
Ⅲ Mail server address and domain name.
Ⅲ The username and password you use to access your corporate mail server.
Ⅲ Security connection: Does your server use an encrypted (SSL) connection?
2. Press Start
and select Programs.
3. Select ActiveSync
.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Add Server Source.
5. Enter the email address that you want to set up.
308
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
6. Uncheck the box to detect the Exchange server settings, and then press Next
(right softkey).
7. If prompted, enter the Server address and check the box if the server requires SSL
encryption, and then press Next
(right softkey).
8. Enter the username and password that you use to access your corporate mail server,
and enter the Exchange server domain.
The Exchange Server settings are case-sensitive. Be sure to enter
uppercase and lowercase letters properly. Be especially careful when
entering the password, because it does not appear on the screen as you
Tip
9. Ask your system administrator if it is OK to store your corporate email password on your
Treo, and then do either of the following:
Ⅲ If it is OK, check the Save password box and press Next
(right softkey).
(right
Ⅲ If it is not OK, do not check the Save password box and press Next
softkey). (You must synchronize manually; see “Initiating a Wireless Sync Manually”
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
309
10. Check the boxes for the types of information you want
to sync with the Exchange server.
11. (Optional) Highlight an item and select Settings to change
the synchronization settings for that type of information.
(Settings are not available for all items.)
12. (Optional) Press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Advanced to set the rules for fixing sync conflicts.
13. Press Finish
(left softkey). (Synchronization with
your Exchange server begins automatically and onscreen
messages indicate sync progress.)
To automatically download more of an incoming email message than the
Tip
default setting, select E-mail in step 10, select Settings, and select a higher
number from the Download size limit list. If you don’t increase this setting,
you can manually download the rest of the message at your convenience.
You can set a schedule for synchronization to take place anytime information is updated on
either your Treo or the server, or at certain intervals (see “Setting the Synchronization
Schedule” on page 310), or you can allow synchronization to take place only when you
Setting the Synchronization Schedule
By default, wireless sync takes place anytime information is updated on either your Treo or
the server using Direct Push technology. To save battery life, however, you can set
synchronization to take place at intervals that you specify.
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Schedule.
310
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
4. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Peak times: Set the frequency for high-traffic time
periods, such as when you are at work or when email
volume is high.
Ⅲ Off-peak times: Set the frequency for low-traffic time
periods, such as late at night.
Ⅲ Use above settings when roaming: Set the frequency
while you are roaming outside Sprint’s network. You
should keep this box checked to ensure that wireless
sync works properly.
Ⅲ Send/receive when I click Send: Set whether items are
sent as soon as you select Send in the Inbox
application, or whether they are held until the next
synchronization.
5. (Optional) To customize your high-traffic periods, select
the peak times link at the bottom of the screen and adjust
the days and times. (For example, if you work Thursday
through Tuesday, you can select those days as your peak
times instead of Monday through Friday.)
6. Press OK
.
Initiating a Wireless Sync Manually
If you want to control exactly when a wireless sync takes place, or if it is not OK to store your
corporate email password on your Treo, you can initiate sync manually.
2. To initiate a manual sync, press Start
and select Programs.
3. Select ActiveSync
.
4. Press Sync
(left softkey).
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
311
Other Ways to Synchronize
Synchronizing Over a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Connection
If your computer is equipped with Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can use a Bluetooth
connection to synchronize your computer and Treo.
Make sure your computer is set up for synchronization (see “Setting Up
Before You
Begin
1. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Windows XP: On your computer, right-click the ActiveSync
icon in the taskbar in
the lower-right corner of the screen, and select Connection Settings.
Ⅲ Windows Vista®: Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center. Select
Connect without setting up your device, and then select Connection settings.
2. Check the Allow connections to one of the following box, and then select the Bluetooth
COM port you set up on your computer.
3. On your Treo, press Start
4. Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth
5. Select the Mode tab and check the Turn on Bluetooth box.
6. Press Start and select Programs.
and select Settings.
.
7. Select ActiveSync
.
8. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Connect via Bluetooth.
9. If this is the first time you’re making a Bluetooth connection to this computer, follow the
onscreen prompts to set up a Bluetooth partnership with this computer. See
information on partnerships.
10. Select Sync.
312
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
11. When synchronization is complete, press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Disconnect Bluetooth.
Synchronizing Over an Infrared Connection
If your computer has an IR (infrared) port, you can synchronize with your computer wirelessly
using the IR port on your Treo.
2. Set up your computer to receive infrared beams. See Windows Help on your computer
for details.
3. On your Treo, press Start
and select Programs.
4. Select ActiveSync
.
5. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Connect via IR.
6. Point the IR port on your Treo directly at your computer’s IR port.
Synchronizing With Multiple Computers
You can set up your Treo to synchronize with up to two computers as well as with Exchange
Server 2007 or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. When synchronizing with
multiple computers, the items that you sync appear on all the computers.
For example, if you set up to sync your Treo with two computers, named C1 and C2, when
you sync Contacts and Calendar on your Treo with both computers, you get the following
results:
ⅷ The contacts and calendar appointments that were on C1 are now also on C2.
ⅷ The contacts and calendar appointments that were on C2 are now also on C1.
ⅷ The contacts and calendar appointments from both computers are on your Treo.
Microsoft® Office Outlook® E-mail can sync with only one computer.
Note
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
313
Changing Which Applications Sync
On your Treo, you can choose which applications you want to sync.
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Options.
4. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Check the box next to any items you want to
synchronize. If you cannot check a box, you may
need to uncheck a box for the same information
type elsewhere in the list.
Ⅲ Uncheck the boxes next to any items you want to stop
synchronizing.
Ⅲ Select an item and then select Settings to customize
the settings for that item. (Settings are not available
for all items.)
For information on synchronizing Microsoft Word documents, Microsoft®
Tip
Excel® spreadsheets, and Microsoft® PowerPoint® presentations, and
Files” on page 260. For information on synchronizing pictures, videos, and
314
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
Stopping Synchronization
If you ever need to manually stop synchronization, follow these steps:
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Stop
(left softkey).
To end the sync relationship between your Treo and a computer, so that
items are no longer synchronized with that computer, select the computer
name on the ActiveSync screen, and then select Delete.
Tip
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
315
316
Section 6B: Synchronizing Information
Today Screen Settings
Tip
Selecting Your Today Screen Background
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Today
.
3. On the Appearance tab, check the Use this picture as the
background box.
4. Select Browse.
5. Select the picture you want to use.
6. Press OK
.
To adjust the transparency of your background picture, see “Using a Picture
Tip
Changing the System Color Scheme
1. Press Start
2. On the Personal tab, select Today
3. On the Appearance tab, select a theme in the list.
4. Press OK
and select Settings.
.
.
318
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Selecting Which Items Appear on Your Today Screen
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Today
.
3. Select the Items tab.
4. Check the boxes next to the items that you want to appear
on your Today screen, and uncheck any items you want to
hide. (For example, to display your speed-dial buttons on
the Today screen, check the Speed Dial box.)
5. (Optional) Highlight an item and select Move Up or Move
Down to change the order in which items appear on the
Today screen.
6. (Optional) Highlight an item and select Options (if available) to configure the settings for
the item, and then press OK
to return to Today Settings.
7. Press OK
.
Lots of third-party plug-ins are available for your Today screen. For clocks,
calculators, MP3 players, weather guides, and much more, visit
Did you know?
System Sound Settings
In certain situations, such as meetings and theaters, you need to turn off all sounds on your
Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device. You can immediately silence all sounds on your device,
including phone ringtones, Calendar notifications, and system sounds. This does not mute the
speaker during phone calls.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
319
Setting the Ringer Switch
1. Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off
.
2. To hear all sounds again, slide the Ringer switch to Sound On
.
1
2
1
2
Sound On
Sound Off
If the Ringer switch is set to no Sound Off
and all sounds are turned off, including any music you may be playing. When you slide the
Ringer switch back to Sound On , it restores the previous sound settings. All sounds are as
loud or as soft as they were before you turned them off.
, the Ringer setting overrides the sound settings
Your Treo includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound Off
Did you know?
Selecting Sounds & Notifications
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Sounds & Notifications
.
320
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
3. On the Sounds tab, set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Events: Turn sounds on and off for system warnings
and error messages.
Ⅲ Programs: Turn sounds on and off that are specific to
the applications on your Treo.
Ⅲ Notifications: Turn alarms and reminders on and
off in all the applications on your Treo.
Ⅲ Screen taps: Set whether tapping the screen generates
a sound, and set the volume level when this sound is
turned on.
Ⅲ Hardware buttons: Set whether pressing buttons generates a sound, and set the
volume level when this sound is turned on.
4. Select the Notifications tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Event: Select which action you want to change the
settings for. (The remaining options vary based on the
action you select.)
Ⅲ Play sound: Turn the sound on and off for the selected
event. (To select a different sound, select the list to the
right of this setting, and then select a different sound. To
preview the sound, select Play .)
Ⅲ Repeat: Set whether a Reminder tone plays more than
once, if Play Sound is turned on.
Ⅲ Display message on screen: Set whether a notification message appears onscreen
for the selected event.
Ⅲ Vibrate: Set whether your Treo vibrates to notify you about the selected event.
5. Select the Manage tab and do any of the following:
Ⅲ To record a sound, press Menu
(right softkey) and select New Sound.
Ⅲ To preview a sound, select it and then press Play
(left softkey).
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
321
Ⅲ To delete a sound, highlight it and then press Backspace
.
Ⅲ To send a sound, highlight it, press Menu
(right softkey), and then select Send
Sound.
6. Press OK
.
Display and Appearance Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
1. Press Option
and then press Backlight
.
2. Press Left and Right to adjust the brightness.
3. Press OK
.
You can turn the clock screen saver on and off. See “Viewing and
Tip
Changing the Text Size
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Screen
3. Select the Text Size tab.
.
4. Press Left and Right to adjust the text size.
5. Press OK
.
If text looks rough around the edges, open the Screen Settings screen and
select the ClearType tab. Check the Enable ClearType box, and then press
Tip
OK.
322
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Aligning the Screen to Correct Tapping Problems
Occasionally, your screen can move out of alignment, activating the wrong feature when you
tap the screen. If this occurs, you need to align your Treo screen.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Screen
3. On the Alignment tab, select Align Screen.
4. Tap the screen where indicated.
.
Setting Display Formats
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Regional Settings
.
3. On the Region tab, select a region from the list. (The region selection sets the default
format settings.)
4. (Optional) Select any of the following tabs to customize the
format settings:
Ⅲ Number: Set the decimal symbol and number of
decimal places, the digit-grouping symbol and group
size, list separators, negative number sign symbol and
format, leading zero display, and measurement system
(metric versus U.S.).
Ⅲ Currency: Set the currency symbol and position, the
decimal symbol and position, the digit-grouping
symbol and group size, and the negative number
format.
Ⅲ Time: Set the time style, separators, and AM and PM symbols.
Ⅲ Date: Set the short date style, separators, and long date style.
5. Press OK
.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
323
You can also change the system color scheme (see “Changing the System
Did you know?
Application Settings
Arranging the Start Menu
You can select which applications appear on the Start menu.
You can still access the remaining applications by selecting
Programs from the Start menu, and then selecting the
application’s icon.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Menus
.
3. Check the boxes next to the applications that you want to
see in the Start menu.
4. Press OK
.
Reassigning Buttons
Buttons Settings lets you select which applications are
associated with many of the buttons and key combinations on
your Treo.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Buttons
.
3. On the Program Buttons tab, highlight the button or key
combination that you want to change in the Select a button
list.
4. Select the Assign a program list, and then select the
application you want to assign to the button or key combination you selected in step 3.
5. Press OK
.
324
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
You can also adjust the settings for the Up and Down buttons on the 5-way.
From Buttons settings, select the Up/Down Control tab.
Tip
Setting Up Voice Commands
Voice commands enable you to use speech to execute some commands on the Start menu
and the Programs menu.
on page 324 for details.)
2. Press Start
and select Settings.
3. On the Personal tab, select Voice Command
.
4. Check the Enable box.
5. Select the items you want to enable. (If an item is highlighted and the Options box is
active, select the Options box to choose the features you want enabled for the
highlighted item.)
6. (Optional) Check the Password Protected box to password protect the Voice Command
feature.
7. Select Notifications and select the options for how you want to receive voice command
notifications.
Using Voice Commands
Do not use voice commands in your car until you read the End User Notice
about this kind of usage; see “End User Notice” on page 2.
Important
1. Set the Ringer switch at the top of your Treo to Sound On
.
2. Hold your device about nine inches away from your mouth, and then press and release
the Voice Command button. (A tone plays and a microphone icon appears at the top of
your screen.)
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
325
3. In a clear voice say the command. For example:
Ⅲ To access Help, say, “Help.”
Ⅲ To access your Calendar, say, “Start Calendar.”
Ⅲ To access your music, say, “Start Windows Media®.”
4. After Voice Command finishes speaking, a microphone icon appears at the top of your
screen; say your answer. (For example, say, “General” to access general Help topics.)
You can interrupt during a question by pressing the Voice Command
button. As soon as the microphone icon is visible you may say your answer.
Tip
Setting Input Options
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Input
.
The Input Method options you specify apply only to entering information
using the screen. You can still enter information using the keyboard on your
Treo regardless of the onscreen input method you choose.
Note
3. On the Input Method tab, set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Input method: Set which onscreen input method you want to use:
Ⅲ Block Recognizer: Use a single stroke to write letters, numbers, symbols, and
punctuation, which are then converted into typed text. Use can also indicate
whether you want to use a stroke instead of pressing the Return key and
Backspace key.
Ⅲ Keyboard: Tap keys on the onscreen keyboard to enter text.
Ⅲ Letter Recognizer: Write individual letters, numbers, and punctuation, which are
converted into typed text.
326
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Ⅲ Large/Small keys: If you selected Keyboard, select
whether to use large or small onscreen keys. If you
select Large keys, check the box if you want to use
gestures for the space, backspace, shift, and enter
keys.
Ⅲ Options: If you selected Letter Recognizer, select
Options and select the options you want.
4. Select the Word Completion tab and set any of the following
options:
Ⅲ Suggest words when entering text: Set whether word
suggestions appear as you enter text. (You can also
specify how many letters you want to enter before a
suggestion appears, how many suggestions you want
to see, and whether a space appears after you insert a
suggested word.)
Ⅲ Clear Stored Entries: Delete the database of word
suggestions.
Ⅲ Enable Auto Correct: Set whether the text you type
adds to existing text or replaces it. (This is similar to the
Insert function on a computer keyboard.)
To enter a suggested word, press Down to highlight the suggestion, and
then press Center to accept it.
Tip
5. Select the Options tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Voice recording format: Set the format in which you save voice notes.
Ⅲ Default zoom level for writing: Set the initial size of text entered using onscreen
writing methods.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
327
Ⅲ Default zoom level for typing: Set the initial size of text
entered using the keyboard.
Ⅲ Capitalize first letter of sentence: Set whether the first
letter of a sentence automatically appears in
uppercase, without pressing the Shift key.
Ⅲ Scroll upon reaching the last line: Set whether the
display automatically scrolls when you select the last
line of visible information.
6. Press OK
.
Locking Your Treo and Information
Your Treo includes several features that help you protect your device from inadvertent use and
keep your information private. The built-in security software lets you use your Treo for
emergency calls, such as dialing 911, even if the phone feature is locked.
ⅷ
Keyguard: Manually disable all buttons and the screen’s touch-sensitive feature to prevent
accidental presses in your briefcase or pocket.
ⅷ
Auto-Keyguard and touchscreen lockout: Automatically enable Keyguard after a period
of inactivity and set whether the screen’s touch-sensitive feature is enabled during calls.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Phone Lock: Require a lock code for access to the wireless features on your Treo.
System password lock: Require a password before any information is accessible on your
Treo.
To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re holding your
Treo up to your ear to speak, you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive
feature during active calls. When the screen’s touch-sensitive feature is
disabled, you must use the 5-way navigator to access items on the screen.
Tip
328
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Using Keyguard
By default, your keyboard locks so that you don’t accidentally press buttons or activate screen
items while your Treo is in a pocket or bag.
ⅷ To dismiss Keyguard, press Center
ⅷ To manually turn on Keyguard when your Treo screen is on, press Option
Power/End
.
and
.
Using Auto-Keyguard and Touchscreen Lockout
Auto-Keyguard lets you automatically lock the keyboard after a period of inactivity.
1. Press Start and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Keyguard
.
3. Set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Auto-Keyguard: Set the period of inactivity that passes
before the keyboard automatically locks or before the
auto-keyguard feature is disabled.
Ⅲ Disable touchscreen: Set whether the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature is enabled during a call. If you
disable the touchscreen, the Touchscreen Disabled
icon appears in the lower-right corner of the screen during your calls.
4. Press OK
.
If you’re using a hands-free device and your Treo is in a pocket or bag, you
can manually turn on Keyguard during a call to prevent accidental key
presses. Press Option and Power/End to manually turn on Keyguard.
Did you know?
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
329
Using Phone Lock
You can lock your phone to prevent unauthorized use of your account. When your phone is
locked, you must enter the lock code to make calls (except for emergency numbers and
Sprint Customer Service [*2]), to send messages, and to use other wireless features such as
browsing the Web.
During an emergency call, you can see the phone number on your Treo by
selecting the onscreen Phone Info button.
Tip
2. Press Start
and select Settings.
3. On the Personal tab, select Phone
.
4. Select the Security tab and set any of the following options:
Ⅲ Auto-lock: Set whether your Treo locks automatically
and when this occurs.
Ⅲ Change Lock Code: Assign or change the lock code
used to unlock your phone. (Your default lock code is
the last four digits of your wireless phone number. If this
doesn’t work, call Sprint Customer Service at
1-888-211-4727. If you change the lock code, select OK
to accept your new code.)
5. Press OK
.
If you try to make a call when Phone Lock is on, a box appears and
prompts you to enter your lock code to unlock the phone. You do not need
to enter your lock code to answer a call.
Tip
330
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Using System Password Lock
To protect your personal information, you can lock the system so that you need to enter your
password to access any of your information or to use other features of your Treo.
If you lock your system, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If
you enter an incorrect password, you are given another chance. Each time
an incorrect password is entered, you are given progressively longer time
periods between your chances to enter the password. If you forget the
password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your Treo.
Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries on your Treo. However, you
can restore all previously synchronized information the next time you sync
might not reestablish a Sprint Power VisionSM session after a hard reset. To
manually establish a new Sprint Power Vision session, open the browser to
access a Web site.
Important
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Lock
.
3. On the Password tab, check the Prompt if device unused for
box to turn on the password feature.
4. Select the first list, and then select how long a period of
inactivity must pass before you are prompted to enter a
password to unlock the system.
5. Select the Password type list, and then select a format for
your password:
Ⅲ Strong alphanumeric: A strong alphanumeric password must contain at least 7
characters and must contain a combination of letters, numerals, and punctuation.
You must press Option or Alt before entering numerals or punctuation.
Ⅲ Simple PIN: A simple PIN must contain at least 4 characters and includes numerals
only. You do not need to press Option before entering the PIN numerals.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
331
6. Select Password, and enter your password.
You can't see your password as you enter it, so be careful. Be sure Caps
Note
Lock and Option Lock are not on unless you need them. For information on
how to enter characters, see “Entering Lowercase and Uppercase Letters”
7. Select Confirm, and enter the password again.
8. (Optional) Select the Hint tab and enter a hint to help you recall your password.
9. Press OK
.
If you lock your Treo and use a Simple PIN as the password, you can dial an
emergency number by entering the number in the password field and
pressing Phone/Talk. You do not need to press Option before entering the
number. However, if you select Strong alphanumeric as the password type,
you must first press Option twice before entering an emergency number in
the password field.
Tip
Entering Owner Information
You can enter personal information that you want to associate with your Treo, such as your
name, company name, and phone number. You can also set whether you want this
information to appear when you turn on your Treo. If you lose your device, this feature can
help the person who finds it return it to you.
332
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. On the Personal tab, select Owner Information
.
3. On the Identification tab, enter any of the contact
information you want to include.
4. Select the Notes tab and then enter any additional text you
want to include.
5. Select the Options tab and check the boxes to indicate
which information (if any) you want to appear on the screen
when you turn on your Treo.
6. Press OK
.
You can also display your Owner Information on your Today screen. See
details.
Tip
System Settings
Setting the Date and Time
Clock & Alarms Settings lets you set the time zone, time, and date for your home location and
a location that you visit.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Clock & Alarms
.
3. On the Time tab, select Home.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
333
4. Select the first list, and then select the time zone for your
home location.
5. Select the hour, and then press Up
or Down
to
increase or decrease the hour setting. (Repeat this process
for the minutes, seconds, and AM/PM settings.)
6. (Optional) Select Visiting and set the information for a
location that you visit often.
7. Press OK
.
8. If prompted, select Yes to accept your changes.
To display the time in all your applications, select the More tab and check
the Display the clock on the title bar in all programs box. To set the display
Tip
Synchronizing the Date, Time, and Time Zone With the Network
By default, your Treo synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with your wireless service
provider’s network whenever your phone is on and you are inside a coverage area.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Clock & Alarms
.
3. Select the More tab.
4. To enter the date and time manually, uncheck the Enable local network time box.
6. Press OK
.
7. If prompted, select Yes to accept your changes.
If you turn off the Use network time zone setting and later turn it on again,
you need to turn your phone off and then on for this setting to take affect.
Note
334
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Setting System Alarms
System alarms let you set alarms that are not associated with a task or appointment. For
example, you can use your Treo as an alarm clock when you travel, or set alarms to remind
you when it’s time to take medication or pick up the kids.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Clock & Alarms
3. Select the Alarms tab.
.
4. Check a box to turn on that alarm.
5. Select the description next to the box you checked, and
enter a description for the alarm.
6. Select the days of the week you want the alarm to go off.
(You can select multiple days for each alarm.)
7. Select the time you want the alarm to go off, and then press
OK
.
8. Select the alarm , icon, and then check the boxes to
indicate how you want the alarm to go off. (You can choose a flashing light, a single
sound, a repeating sound, or a vibration.)
To change the alarm sound, select the alarm sound icon, select the
Play Sound list, and then select the alarm sound you want to use.
Tip
9. Press OK
twice.
10. If prompted, select Yes to accept your changes.
Managing Identity Certificates
Your Treo may include preinstalled certificates. Certificates are digital documents that are
used to authenticate and exchange information on networks. Certificates can be issued for a
user, a device, or a service.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
335
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Certificates
.
3. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ Personal: Display certificates that establish your identity when you log in to a
secured network, such as a corporate network.
Ⅲ Intermediate: Display certificates issued from a root certificate whose purpose is to
then issue personal certificates.
Ⅲ Root: Display certificates that identify the computers, such as servers, that you
connect to. (These certificates help prevent unauthorized users from accessing your
Treo and your information.)
4. Press OK
.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the certificate in the list, and then select
Delete from the shortcut menu.
Tip
Enabling Error Reporting
Error Reporting sends information that helps diagnose application errors for devices running
Windows Mobile® software. When an error is detected, a text file is created. You can review the
file and choose whether you want it delivered to Microsoft Support. The information is used by
programming groups at Microsoft for quality control and is not used for tracking individual
users or installations for any marketing purpose. The information that is collected is technical
information about the state of your system when the error occurred. No documents (or any
information contained in them) are intentionally sent with the report. To ensure further security,
the report is transmitted by means of a secure connection and is kept confidential and
anonymous in a limited-access database.
336
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
This error-reporting method meets the privacy regulations of the European
Union (EU) as well as the Fair Information Practice Principles of the Federal
Trade Commission. To view the Fair Information Practice Principles, visit the
Federal Trade Commission Web site at
Tip
If your Treo is connected to your computer when you send the error report, you are not billed
for sending error reports—provided your computer is connected to the Internet. If you use the
Sprint network to send an error report, data transfer charges apply.
1. Press Start
2. Select the System tab, and then select Error Reporting
3. Select whether you want to enable or disable error reporting.
4. Press OK
and select Settings.
.
.
Setting Up an External GPS Device
If you purchased an optional Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, your Treo can show
your exact location on a map. The External GPS settings do not affect the built-in GPS
features of your device.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select External GPS
.
3. On the Programs tab, select the GPS program port list, and then select the port for
applications to use to access GPS information. (This port must also be selected in your
GPS application’s configuration settings.)
4. Select the Hardware tab.
5. Select the GPS hardware port list, and then select the port to which your GPS receiver is
connected. (This must be a different port from the one you set in step 3 as your program
port. To connect to the GPS device using Bluetooth® wireless technology, you must first
set up a partnership between the two devices. See “Setting Up a Bluetooth Connection”
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
337
6. Select the Access tab and check the Manage GPS automatically box. This setting lets
more than one application simultaneously access your GPS information.
7. Press OK
.
Viewing Memory Usage
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Memory
3. Select either of the following tabs:
.
Ⅲ Main: View the amount of memory assigned to your applications and information,
as well as the amount of memory in use versus the available memory.
Ⅲ Storage Card: View the amount of memory available on an expansion card that is
inserted into the expansion slot on your Treo.
4. Press OK
.
Viewing and Optimizing Power Settings
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the System tab, and then select Power
.
3. On the Battery tab, check the Battery Power Remaining indicator to see how much
power remains in your battery.
338
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
4. Select the Advanced tab and set whether your Treo turns off automatically after a
specified period of inactivity. (You can assign various intervals for battery power and
external power.)
5. Select the Screen Saver tab and set whether the clock screen saver appears when the
phone is turned on and the screen is turned off.
6. Press OK
.
To conserve additional battery power, adjust the display backlight setting.
Press Start and select Settings. Select the System tab, and then select
Backlight. On the Battery Power tab, set whether the display backlight
turns off automatically after a period of inactivity.
Tip
Viewing and Managing Active Tasks
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select System and then select Task Manager
.
3. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Close a specific application: Highlight the application’s name and press End Task
(left softkey).
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
339
Ⅲ Close all active applications: Press Menu
(right softkey), select End All Tasks,
and then select Yes to confirm the action.
Ⅲ View a list of all active processes: Press Menu
(right softkey) and select
View > Processes.
4. Press OK
.
You can also press and hold Option + OK to access Task Manager.
Tip
Connection Settings
Turning Wireless Services On and Off
1. Press Start
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Wireless
Manager
and select Settings.
.
3. Turn the wireless features of your Treo on or off.
(Select All to turn all wireless features on or off.)
4. Press OK
.
You can also turn wireless services on and off by tapping the
signal-strength icon at the top of the screen and then selecting
Tip
Wireless Manager.
To change the settings for one of the displayed wireless features, press
Menu (right softkey) and select the wireless feature you want to change.
340
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Managing ISP Settings
Your Treo is already set up to connect to the Internet using a high-speed data connection on
the Sprint network. To connect to the Internet, simply start Internet Explorer® Mobile.
For special situations, such as connecting to your ISP (Internet service provider) or a remote
access server (RAS), you can set up another connection. Before you begin, obtain the
following information from your ISP or system administrator:
Obtain the following information from your ISP or system administrator:
Before You
Begin
•
•
•
ISP server phone number or access point.
Username.
Password.
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Connections
3. On the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections.
4. Select the Modem tab.
.
5. Highlight the connection you want to view or change, and then select Edit, or to create a
new connection, select New.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions for editing or creating the connection.
Connecting to a VPN
If you want to use your Treo to access your corporate email account or other files on your
corporate server, you may need to set up a VPN (virtual private network). A VPN enables you
to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall (security layer).
You need to set up a VPN to access a corporate server in either of the following situations:
ⅷ Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is outside the firewall.
ⅷ Your company’s wireless LAN is inside the firewall, but you are accessing the network
from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home).
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
341
Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required
for accessing the corporate network. If you need a VPN, you must purchase
and install a third-party VPN client in order to use this feature. Before you
begin setting up a VPN, ask your system administrator for the following
information:
Before You
Begin
•
•
•
•
Your username and password.
Your server’s domain name.
Your server’s TCP/IP settings.
Your server’s host name or IP address.
A common cause of sync problems is the presence of protective software,
such as VPNs or firewalls, on your computer or network. See “The Desktop
Did you know?
2. Press Start and select Settings.
3. Select the Connections tab, and then select Connections
.
4. On the Tasks tab, select Add a new VPN server connection.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions for entering the settings provided by your corporate
system administrator.
To manually start a data connection on the Sprint network or another
network, go to Connections Settings. On the Tasks tab, select Manage
existing connections. Tap and hold the connection you want to start, and
then select Connect from the shortcut menu.
Tip
Setting Up a Proxy Server
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Connections
3. On the Tasks tab, select Set up my proxy server.
.
342
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
4. Check both of the boxes near the top of the screen.
5. Select Proxy server and enter the proxy server name.
To change settings such as the port number, proxy server type, or
credentials, select Advanced.
Tip
6. Press OK
.
Setting a proxy server may prevent you from accessing some Sprint Power
Vision Web pages.
Note
Ending a Data Connection
If your service plan includes minutes-of-use fees for data connections, you can reduce costs
by ending the data connection after you finish browsing the Web.
1. Use the stylus to tap the
or
signal icon on the title bar.
2. Select Disconnect from the shortcut menu.
Enrolling a Domain
If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, you may need to use
the Domain Enroll settings to register your Treo within your company’s network.
After you enroll your device in your company’s network, your system
administrator can turn various features on your Treo on and off. If a feature,
such as the camera or messaging, worked previously and this feature no
longer works after enrollment, contact your system administrator to find out
if this feature is disabled on your Treo.
Important
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Domain Enroll
.
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
343
3. Press Enroll
(right softkey).
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the enrollment process.
Purchasing Accessories for Your Treo
These accessories, and others, are available from your local Sprint Store or at
palm.com/treo800wsprint-support. For more information, you can also call Sprint at
ⅷ
Vehicle Power Charger: A charger that enables you to charge your Treo in your vehicle
using the car lighter socket.
ⅷ
Replacement Battery: A backup battery that you can use if your primary battery becomes
drained, is charging, or has reached the end of its useful life.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Battery Charger: A charger that enables you to charge a spare battery.
USB Sync Cable: A replacement or spare cable (your Treo comes with one USB sync
cable).
ⅷ
ⅷ
Extra AC Charger: A 100-to-240-volt AC charger for your Treo.
Palm® TreoTM 800 Power/Audio Adapter: An adapter that enables you to charge your Treo
and use a wired headset at the same time.
ⅷ
ⅷ
MicroUSB/2.5mm adapter: An adapter that enables you to connect a wired headset with
a 2.5mm connector to your Treo.
International Travel Adapters: Snap-on adapters that enable you to use the Extra AC
charger in continental Europe, the United Kingdom, and Australia. (For use with the Extra
AC Charger only.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
Leather Side Case With Belt Clip: A case that you can clip to your belt or bag that
provides quick access to and protection for your Treo.
Stylus: A replacement or spare stylus for your Treo.
344
Section 6C: Customizing Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
346
Although we can’t anticipate all the situations that might arise, this chapter provides helpful
information and answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. For additional
Transferring Information From Another Device
For information on transferring your information from a previous Windows Mobile® device or
from a Palm OS® by ACCESS device to your new Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device, visit
If you have questions about Windows Mobile, you can also go to the Microsoft Windows
To prevent your Treo from malfunctioning, do not use a backup utility to
transfer your information from another device to your new Treo. In addition,
do not use a backup utility to back up and restore your information if you
update the operating system on your Treo.
Important
Trouble Installing the Desktop Software on a Windows XP
Computer?
The desktop synchronization software lets you synchronize with Microsoft® Outlook® 2003 or
later. You must have Outlook 2003 or later (sold separately) installed on your computer, and
you should install and open Outlook before you install or use Microsoft® ActiveSync®
technology.
If you don’t have Outlook 2003 or later installed on your computer, insert the
CD into your computer’s CD drive, select Palm® Support Center, and then
select Microsoft® Outlook® 2007 (60-day trial) to download a trial version of
this software.
Tip
348
Section 7A: Help
If you want to synchronize with a different personal information manager (PIM), you must
install a third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to find out whether software
is available for your Treo.
1. Shut down your computer, and then turn it on again.
2. On your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
3. Remove ActiveSync if it is on your computer.
4. Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications.
5. Make sure you’re installing the version of the software that came with your Treo on the
Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device. (Other versions may not work with
this Treo.)
6. Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software.
(In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator.)
Resetting Your Palm® Treo™ 800W Smart Device
Performing a Soft Reset
A soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your Treo is not responding or you have
trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help.
1. If your Treo responds to key presses, press and hold Power/End
to turn off your
phone.
2. If the screen display is on, press Power/End
to turn off the screen.
4. Wait for the progress bar on the Palm logo screen to fill and the Windows Mobile screen
to transition to the Today screen before continuing to use your Treo. (Be patient, this may
take a few minutes.)
Section 7A: Help
349
Performing a Hard Reset
A hard reset erases all personal information, such as appointments, contacts, and tasks, as
well as programs you have added, such as third-party software, on your Treo. Never do a hard
reset without first trying a soft reset. You can restore previously synchronized information the
next time you sync.
Review the following important information before performing a hard reset:
ⅷ After a hard reset, synchronize to restore your Outlook data, such as Outlook email,
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks. You can also use the included Sprite Backup utility
to restore previously backed up configurations and preferences such as speed-dials, SMS
entries, call log information, and personal settings.
ⅷ Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you
synchronize. If you do a hard reset, you may lose information in these applications and
you need to reinstall the application on your Treo after the hard reset. Please contact the
developer to find out if your information is backed up during synchronization.
ⅷ When you synchronize after a hard reset, the Files sync folder reverts to the default folder
name.
ⅷ Your Treo might not reestablish a Sprint Power VisionSM session after a hard reset. To
manually establish a new Sprint Power Vision session, open the Web browser to access a
Web site.
A hard reset can tell you whether a problem stems from your Treo or from an application
installed on it. If you do not experience the problem after you perform a hard reset, the
problem may be related to software you installed. See “Third-Party Applications” on page 373
for suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues.
1. If possible, synchronize your device with your computer so that your device applications
and info can be restored by synchronizing again after you perform the hard reset.
2. Remove the battery from your Treo.
on page 351 for details.)
350
Section 7A: Help
4. When the Palm logo screen appears and the progress bar begins to fill, release
Power/End
5. When the “Erase all data?” prompt appears, press Up
.
to confirm the hard reset.
6. Wait for the progress bar on the Palm logo screen to fill again and for the Windows
Mobile screen to appear.
7. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen before continuing to use your Treo.
8. (Optional) Sync your Treo with your computer to restore your previously synchronized
information. (Connect your Treo to your computer, press Start, and then select Programs
> ActiveSync > Sync. If you use Sprite Backup or another compatible backup utility,
you may also need to restore a backup to recover additional information and settings.)
Replacing the Battery
Your Treo comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a replacement battery from Palm
for information on handling the battery safely.
Use only batteries and chargers that are approved by Sprint or Palm with
your Treo. Failure to use an approved battery or charger may prevent your
Treo from turning on or charging, may void your Treo warranty, and may
increase the risk of your Treo overheating, catching fire, or exploding, which
may also result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.
WARNING
Your Treo stores all your information even when you remove the battery.
Did you know?
1. Press Power/End
to turn off the screen.
2. Gently press the battery door while sliding it downward to remove it from your Treo.
3. Place a finger in the notch between the stylus and the battery, and lift the old battery out
of the compartment.
4. Align the contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment
and press the battery into place.
Section 7A: Help
351
5. Slide the battery door onto the back of the Treo until it clicks into place.
6. Wait for the screen to turn on, and then enable the network time or set the date and time
when prompted.
1
2
1
2
Battery Contacts
Device Contacts
Be sure to dispose of your old battery in an environmentally responsible and
legal way. In some areas, disposal in household or business trash is
Tip
352
Section 7A: Help
Performance
The Applications Are Running Slower Than Usual
Be sure that third-party applications are compatible with Windows Mobile
Tip
Professional version 6.1 or later. Applications written for earlier versions can
have performance problems. If you can try a free version of the software
before purchasing it, you can test it first to make sure it works properly.
1. In your open applications, save any unsaved information you want to keep.
2. Press Start and select Settings.
3. Select System and then select Task Manager
4. Press Menu (right softkey) and select End All Tasks.
5. Select Yes to close all your open applications and discard all unsaved information.
.
6. Press OK
.
You can also press and hold OK or Option + OK to access Task Manager.
Tip
If the previous steps don’t fix the problem, try doing a soft reset (see “Performing a Soft Reset”
Command setting, if it is enabled:
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Personal tab, and then select Voice Command
.
3. Uncheck the Enabled box.
4. Press OK
.
Section 7A: Help
353
I Can’t Beam or Receive Information Via Infrared or Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Beam
.
3. Check the Receive all incoming beams box.
4. Press OK
.
5. If beaming still does not work and your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile
Device Manager, contact your system administrator to find out whether infrared or
Bluetooth® wireless technology features are disabled on your Treo.
I Can’t Save or Access Files on an Expansion Card
ⅷ Make sure the card is not locked or copy-protected.
ⅷ If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your
system administrator to find out whether removable storage features are disabled on
your Treo.
I Can’t Charge the Battery
ⅷ If you’re using a new battery or a new charger, make sure the battery and charger are
approved by Sprint or Palm for use with your Treo. Failure to use an approved battery or
charger may prevent your device from turning on or charging.
ⅷ If you’re using an existing, approved battery, the battery may have reached the end of its
354
Section 7A: Help
Screen
Make sure that third-party applications support 320 x 320 screen resolution.
Some older applications have screen-size limits.
Tip
The Screen Appears Blank
1. The screen backlight dims when there is no keyboard activity for 30 seconds. The
screen backlight turns off automatically when the screen turns off or when you are on a
call or playing music in the background for longer than the time period specified in
Backlight Settings expires. (Press any key to wake up the screen. Keep in mind that
pressing Power/End hangs up any calls in progress.)
2. Look closely at the screen, and if you can see a dim image, try adjusting the
page 29) and perform a soft reset again.
5. If you’re using a third-party application, make sure that the application supports
320x320 screen resolution.
The Screen Doesn’t Respond Accurately to Taps or Activates Wrong Features
1. Make sure there is no debris trapped under the edges of the screen.
2. Press Start
and select Settings.
3. Select the System tab, and then select Screen
.
4. On the Alignment tab, select Align Screen.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.
Section 7A: Help
355
6. Press OK
.
To find carrying cases that protect the screen, and other useful accessories,
Tip
Network Connection
Signal Strength Is Weak
ⅷ If you’re standing, move about ten feet in any direction.
ⅷ If you’re in a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.
ⅷ If you’re in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.
ⅷ If you’re outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
ⅷ If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo so that it’s level with a window.
Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work,
and play, so you know when to expect signal-strength issues.
Tip
My Treo Won’t Connect to the Wireless Network
1. Try the preceding suggestions for weak signals.
page 35).
My Treo Seems to Turn Off by Itself
If a system error and reset occur, the phone automatically turns on if it was on before the
reset. However, if your Treo can’t determine if your phone was on before the reset, it does not
356
Section 7A: Help
I Can’t Tell If Data Services Are Available
1xRTT (single-carrier [1x] radio transmission technology): A wireless
technology that can provide fast data transfer and Internet access, with
average speeds of 60-to-80Kbps and bursts of up to 144Kbps.
Key term
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized): A wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high-speed data transfer, with average download speeds
of 400-to-600Kbps, and capable of reaching speeds up to 3.2Mbps and
upload speeds up to 1.8Mbps.
Key term
The following icons appear in the title bar to indicate whether data services are available. If
you don’t see one of these icons, you cannot open a data connection:
or
The Sprint Mobile Broadband (EVDO) or Sprint 1xRTT network
is within range. You can make or receive calls or open a data
connection.
Your Treo is connected to a Wi-Fi network. You can open a
data connection.
My Treo Won’t Connect to the Internet
Your Treo supports Sprint Mobile Broadband (EVDO), Sprint 1xRTT, and Wi-Fi wireless data
networks. To connect to the Internet, you must either subscribe to data services with Sprint or
be within range of a Wi-Fi network.
ⅷ Contact Sprint to verify that your subscription plan includes data services and that these
services have been correctly activated. Sprint should also be able to tell you if there are
any outages in your location.
ⅷ If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager and you’re
attempting to make a Wi-Fi connection, contact your system administrator to find out
whether Wi-Fi features are disabled on your Treo.
Section 7A: Help
357
ⅷ Press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same
button to turn it back on again.
ⅷ Confirm that data services are correctly configured on your Treo:
1. Press Start
and select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Connections
.
3. On the Tasks tab, select Manage existing connections.
4. If Power Vision appears in the list, press OK
. If not, contact Sprint for assistance.
I Can’t Send or Receive Text Messages
ⅷ Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes messaging services, that these services
have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location (Sprint should
be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays).
ⅷ If possible, contact the recipient of the message, and make sure the receiving device can
handle the type of message you’re sending.
ⅷ If a text message arrives but does not display a notification, perform a soft reset
ⅷ If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your
system administrator to find out whether messaging features are disabled on your Treo.
I Can’t Make or Receive Calls Using a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device
Verify all of the following:
ⅷ The Turn on Bluetooth box is checked in Bluetooth Settings.
ⅷ Your Bluetooth device is charged and turned on.
ⅷ Your Treo is within range of the hands-free device. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10
meters) in optimum environmental conditions, which include the absence of obstacles,
radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
ⅷ The Bluetooth Settings screen is closed.
358
Section 7A: Help
ⅷ The Wi-Fi feature is off. If Wi-Fi is on, press and hold Wi-Fi
to turn this feature off, and
then try to use your Bluetooth device again.
ⅷ You are away from other devices using the 2.4GHz radio frequency, such as cordless
phones and microwaves. If this is impossible, move the phone closer to the hands-free
device.
ⅷ The device specifications are compatible with your Treo.
ⅷ If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your
system administrator to find out whether Bluetooth features are disabled on your Treo.
I Lost the Connection Between My Treo and My Bluetooth Headset
1. Press Start
and then select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth.
3. On the Devices tab, select Add New Device.
4. Select your headset name from the list.
5. In Partnership Settings, make sure the Hands Free box is checked.
6. Select Save.
7. Highlight the headset name.
8. Press and hold Center
to open the shortcut menu, and then select Set as
Hands-Free.
9. Test your headset by making or receiving a call.
If the headset still doesn’t work, delete the existing partnership and create a new one. To
delete the partnership, do the following:
1. Press Start
and then select Settings.
2. Select the Connections tab, and then select Bluetooth.
3. On the Devices tab, highlight the headset device name.
4. Press and hold Center
to open the shortcut menu, and then select Delete.
Section 7A: Help
359
Synchronization
Synchronization enables you to back up the information on your Treo onto your computer or
your server. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise erase all your information on
your Treo, you can synchronize your Treo with your computer to restore the information.
To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your information, synchronize
frequently.
You can synchronize email and other information directly with Exchange Server 2007 or
Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2, using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or
you can synchronize your Treo with your computer, using the desktop sync software (see
You can go to the Windows Web site for more information at
Did you know?
A common cause of sync problems is the presence of protective software,
such as VPNs or firewalls, on your computer or network.
Desktop Sync Software
This section covers issues with synchronizing using the desktop sync software that came with
your Treo. If you have a Windows XP computer, the desktop sync software is called
ActiveSync® desktop software. If you have a Windows Vista® computer, the desktop sync
software is called Windows Mobile Device Center.
The Desktop Sync Software Does Not Respond to a Sync Attempt
If you can successfully sync at any point during the following procedure, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
1. Make sure you are using the USB sync cable that came with your Treo or a replacement
cable that has been approved by Palm for use with a Treo 800W smart device.
360
Section 7A: Help
3. If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your
system administrator to find out whether desktop synchronization features are disabled
on your Treo.
4. Make sure that all the files you’re trying to sync are closed on both your computer and
your Treo.
5. Check synchronization progress:
Ⅲ On your Treo, look for the animated ActiveSync
Ⅲ On your computer, look for the animated sync icon in the taskbar:
or (Windows Vista).
6. If you did not see the correct icons, do the following:
Ⅲ On your Treo: Press Start , select Programs, select ActiveSync
press Menu (right softkey), select Connections, and make sure the
icon at the top of your screen.
(Windows XP)
, and then
Synchronize all PCs using this connection box is checked and that USB is selected
from the list.
Ⅲ Windows XP computer: Click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync.
Ⅲ Windows Vista computer: Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device
Center.
7. Do one of the following
Ⅲ Windows XP computer: Double-click the ActiveSync
icon in your taskbar, and
then from the File menu, select Connection Settings, make sure the Allow USB
connections box is checked, and then click Connect.
Ⅲ Windows Vista computer: Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device
Center. Select Connect without setting up your device, and then select Connection
settings. Make sure the Allow USB connections box is checked, and then click
Connect.
8. On your Treo, press Start
select USB to PC . If the Enable advanced network functionality box is checked,
uncheck it. If this box is currently unchecked, then check it.
, select Settings, select the Connections tab, and then
Section 7A: Help
361
10. Restart your computer and make sure the desktop sync software is running.
11. If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the
sync cable to a different USB port on the hub or directly to your computer’s built-in USB
port.
12. If you’re synchronizing through a built-in USB port on the front of your computer, move
the sync cable to a USB port on the back of your computer (if your computer has USB
ports in both places).
13. For a Windows XP computer only: Uninstall the desktop software that came with your
Treo, and then insert the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device, and
repeat the installation process.
14. For a Windows XP computer only: Delete the existing partnership between your Treo
and your computer and create a new one by doing the following steps in turn:
Ⅲ Disconnect your Treo and your computer from the sync cable.
Ⅲ Right-click the gray ActiveSync
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your computer screen, and then select Open Microsoft ActiveSync.
Ⅲ Click File and then click Delete Mobile Device. When asked to confirm, click Yes.
Ⅲ Connect your Treo and your computer to the sync cable.
Ⅲ When the Synchronization Setup Wizard appears, follow the steps to establish a sync
relationship between your Treo and your computer.
15. If your organization uses a firewall or a VPN connection, synchronizing with ActiveSync
for the following topics to help with specific firewall setup situations:
Ⅲ ActiveSync USB Connection Troubleshooting Guide
Ⅲ ActiveSync with Sygate Personal Firewall
Ⅲ ActiveSync with Trend Micro PC-cillin Internet Security
Ⅲ ActiveSync with Norton Personal Firewall
362
Section 7A: Help
16. Verify with your computer hardware vendor that your operating system supports your
internal USB controller.
A common cause of sync problems is the presence of protective software,
such as VPNs or firewalls, on your computer or network.
Did you know?
Tip
If you are synchronizing to an Exchange server and you’re unable to change
your lock settings, check with your system administrator to find out if a
systemwide locking policy is in place.
Synchronization Finishes But Information Doesn’t Appear Where It Should
ⅷ With the included software, your Treo can synchronize with the root folders of Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Notes. If you want to synchronize with a global Exchange Address
Book, you must copy the addresses to your local Contacts list in Microsoft Office Outlook.
Right-click the addresses and select Add to Personal Address Book.
ⅷ Microsoft Office Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the
included software. You may want to use a third-party solution instead.
ⅷ If you’re trying to sync offline, be sure to set your Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar,
Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.
ⅷ If you’re still having problems, try the following:
1. Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information
manager (PIM). The Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device lets you
synchronize with Microsoft Office Outlook for Windows. If you use a different PIM, you
need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more information, consult the
company that makes the PIM.
2. Open the desktop sync software on your computer, and make sure the Files
3. For a Windows XP computer only: Uninstall the desktop synchronization software,
reboot your computer, and then insert the Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart
device that came with your Treo, and repeat the installation process.
Section 7A: Help
363
Synchronization Starts But Doesn’t Finish
1. Make sure that you installed the desktop software that came with your Treo. If you’re not
sure whether this software is installed, reinstall it.
2. If you’re trying to sync offline, be sure to set your Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar,
Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.
My Windows Media® Player Library Won’t Sync
1. Make sure you have Windows Media® Player 10 or later installed on your computer.
2. For a Windows XP computer only: Reinstall your synchronization software from the
Getting Started CD for Palm Treo 800w smart device that came with your Treo. Media
file synchronization fails if you installed the synchronization software before you installed
Windows Media Player 10 or later.
My Appointments Show Up in the Wrong Time Slot After I Sync
1. Make sure the appointments are assigned to the correct time zone. (If not, change the
time zone. If yes, then continue to the next step.)
2. Make sure that you installed the desktop software that came with your Treo. If you're not
sure whether this software is installed, reinstall it.
3. Open Microsoft Office Outlook and correct the wrong entries.
4. Manually enter any information you’ve added to your Treo since the last time
you synchronized.
5. Synchronize your Treo and your computer.
364
Section 7A: Help
I Can’t Synchronize Using a Bluetooth Connection
Do the following:
Before You
Begin
•
Make sure your computer is equipped with Bluetooth wireless
technology, either built-in or through a Bluetooth card.
•
•
Make sure that the PC’s Bluetooth setting is discoverable.
Make sure your computer is set up for synchronization (see “Setting
1. Do one of the following:
Windows XP computer: Right-click the gray ActiveSync
icon in the taskbar, and
select Connection Settings.
Windows Vista computer: Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center.
Select Connect without setting up your device, and then select Connection settings.
2. Check Allow connections to one of the following, and then select the Bluetooth COM port
you set up on your computer.
.
4. Select the Mode tab, and then check the Turn on Bluetooth box to turn on the Bluetooth
feature on your Treo.
5. Press OK
.
6. Press Start
and select Programs.
7. Select ActiveSync
.
8. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Connect via Bluetooth.
9. If this is the first time you’re making a Bluetooth connection to this computer, follow the
onscreen prompts to set up a Bluetooth partnership with this computer.
10. Select Sync.
Section 7A: Help
365
11. When synchronization has finished, press Menu
(right softkey) and select
Disconnect Bluetooth.
Exchange ActiveSync (wireless synchronization)
I Can’t Synchronize With My Company’s Exchange Server
If you’re unable to change your lock settings, check with your system administrator to find out
if a systemwide locking policy is in place.
My Scheduled Sync Doesn’t Work
ⅷ If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your
system administrator to find out whether synchronization frequency settings are restricted
on your Treo.
ⅷ By default, a scheduled sync does not work while you are roaming. This is to prevent
roaming charges on your account. If roaming charges are not a concern, follow these
steps to continue your sync schedule while roaming:
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Schedule.
4. Check the Use above setting when roaming box.
5. Press OK
.
An Alert Tells Me That ActiveSync Encountered a Problem on the Server
There is a temporary problem with the server, or the server may be temporarily overloaded.
Try again later, and if the problem persists, contact your system administrator.
An Alert Tells Me That There Is Not Enough Free Memory to Synchronize
ActiveSync ran out of storage space. Try the following:
page 71 for details).
of other ways to free up space on your Treo.
366
Section 7A: Help
An Alert Tells Me That the Server Could Not Be Reached
Your Treo had to wait too long to connect to the Exchange server. The connection may have
been lost, the server may be temporarily overloaded, or the server may have encountered an
internal error. Check your Exchange server name and proxy server settings (see “Setting Up
Wireless Synchronization” on page 308), and try again later.
An Alert Tells Me That ActiveSync Encountered a Problem With [Item Type] [Item Name]
There is an error while synchronizing a single item. This error can usually be corrected only
by removing the item that caused the error. If you sync again to see if the error persists, be
aware that items causing this type of error are skipped and do not show up again.
An Alert Tells Me That My Account Information Could Not Be Detected
When you set up the Exchange server sync options, the credentials page was left blank.
your Treo to sync only with a computer, and try to sync again.
An Alert Tells Me that My Device Timed Out While Waiting For Credentials
The Exchange server credentials screen was left open too long. Reenter the Exchange server
credentials, and try to sync again.
My Today Screen Settings Are Not Restored After a Hard Reset
Settings such as the background image and plug-in choices are not backed up during
synchronization, so they can’t be restored after a hard reset. If you use a backup utility, such
as the included Sprite Backup, you may be able to restore a backup to recover your Today
screen settings and other additional information.
When I Sync With My Exchange Server My Information Is Not Downloading to My Treo
Check with your system administrator to obtain the name of the mail server that offers you
wireless access to the corporate mail system. If you cannot obtain the name of this server
(some companies do not give it out, because they do not want wireless access to their
servers), you cannot use ActiveSync to synchronize with the Exchange server. You can also
check the following setting:
Section 7A: Help
367
1. Press Start
and select Programs.
2. Select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Configure Server.
4. Make sure the SSL box is checked.
Email
I Have Problems Using My Account
Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you
followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account,
verify that the account complies with your email provider’s requirements by following
these steps:
ⅷ Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
ⅷ Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email
account. If this is the case, be sure to use your provider’s network as the connection type
for the account.
ⅷ Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service. Check
with your service provider to find out whether any provider-specific requirements exist.
ⅷ Service provider settings frequently change. If your email account was working but you
are currently experiencing problems, check with your service provider to find out whether
any of the account settings have changed.
I Have Problems Sending and Receiving Email
ⅷ Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common, due to server problems or
poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended
period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is
working properly, and check with Sprint Customer Service for outage information in your
area.
368
Section 7A: Help
ⅷ If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your
system administrator to find out whether email features are disabled on your Treo.
Auto Sync Is Not Working
If Auto Sync is occurring and you turn your Treo off, or if the connection to your email service
provider is disconnected, the Auto Sync fails.
1. Check the synchronization schedule to make sure that Auto Sync is set to occur at the
details).
2. Press Start
, select Programs, and then select ActiveSync
.
3. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Add Server Source or Configure Server.
(Make sure the verify password setting is on. This is required for wireless
synchronization.)
I Have Problems Sending Email
If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps:
1. Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a Treo. Some
providers do not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade for you to
access email on a Treo.
2. Turn on ESMTP. Many services require authenticated access, or ESMTP, to use their
SMTP servers.
3. Press Start
, select Programs, and then select ActiveSync
.
4. Press Menu
(right softkey) and select Configure Server. (Make sure the SSL box is
checked.)
5. Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as
cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send
email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from these
accounts, but if you want to send email, you must send it through another server.
Contact Sprint for an outgoing mail server option based on your Sprint account settings.
Section 7A: Help
369
In other cases, your ISP may be able to provide you with the outgoing mail server
settings required to send mail from your Treo.
I Have Problems Synchronizing Messages on My Treo With Messages on My
Computer
Make sure you have chosen the same settings for the account on both your Treo and your
computer. For example, if the account is set up on your Treo to use the POP protocol, check
the ActiveSync settings on your computer to make sure that POP is selected as the protocol
for that account.
My vCard or vCal Email Attachment Isn’t Forwarding Correctly
Microsoft Office Outlook provides several features that work with email client software on a
Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be
properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:
1. On your computer, click Start > Control Panel.
2. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.
3. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software.
4. Click OK.
5. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client.
(Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information.)
Web
I Can’t Access a Page
1. Make sure you have Internet access:
Ⅲ Open Internet Explorer® Mobile and try to view a Web page you’ve loaded before.
Ⅲ To ensure that you’re viewing the page directly from the Internet, press Menu
(right softkey) and select Refresh.
370
Section 7A: Help
Ⅲ After confirming your Internet connection, try to view the page in question again. If it
comes up blank, press Menu (right softkey) and select Refresh.
Ⅲ If you’re still having trouble, the page may contain elements that are not supported
by Internet Explorer Mobile, such as Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WML script, and
other plug-ins.
2. Some Web sites use a redirector to their true home page (for example, if you enter the
address http://www.palm.com/support, it may resolve
to http://www.palm.com/us/support. If Internet Explorer Mobile can’t follow the redirect,
try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and enter that
address in Internet Explorer Mobile.
3. If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager and you’re
attempting to connect to the Internet with a Wi-Fi connection, contact your system
administrator to find out whether Wi-Fi features are disabled on your Treo.
An Image or Map Is Too Small on My Treo Screen
Internet Explorer Mobile has various viewing modes: One Column, Fit to Screen, Desktop, and
A Secure Site Refuses to Permit a Transaction
Some Web sites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the site’s Web
master to make sure the site allows transactions using Internet Explorer Mobile.
Camera
Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:
ⅷ Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.
ⅷ Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the
sensitivity of the camera.
Section 7A: Help
371
ⅷ Hold the camera as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm against your
body or a stationary object, such as a wall.
ⅷ Keep the subject of the pictures still. Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so you
may see a blur.
ⅷ For best results, position the brightest light source behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light.
ⅷ Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to ensure good focus.
Remember that when you synchronize, your Camera images are stored in the following
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\My Documents\<device
name> My Documents.
Windows Vista: C:\Users\<Username>\Pictures.
My Camera Won’t Take Pictures
If your company uses Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager, contact your system
administrator to find out whether the camera features are disabled on your Treo.
The Camera Preview Image Looks Strange
Some third-party applications overwrite the color settings of your Treo with their own 8-bit
color settings. This can affect the Camera Preview Mode. Delete third-party applications one
by one until the preview image improves.
Pictures are 16-bit color. Resolution settings range from 1600 x 1200 to
160 x 120 pixels. Video resolution settings range from 320 x 240 to 176 x
144 pixels. You can change the resolution setting by pressing Menu (right
softkey) and selecting Resolution (still images) or Quality (video).
Did you know?
372
Section 7A: Help
Third-Party Applications
Sometimes, third-party applications can cause conflicts on your Treo. Third-party applications
that modify wireless features may affect the performance of your device and may require extra
troubleshooting. Use caution when installing the following types of applications:
ⅷ Ringtone managers.
ⅷ Caller ID applications.
ⅷ Instant messaging.
ⅷ Applications that modify when your phone or data connections turn on or off and how
your phone behaves.
Remember that not all third-party applications were written with the Treo
keyboard and 5-way navigator in mind. You may encounter strange
behavior or errors in these applications if you use the keyboard and 5-way
navigator.
Tip
If you recently installed an application and your Treo seems to be stuck, try the following:
2. Make sure the third-party application is compatible with the Windows Mobile version 6.1
operating system on your Treo.
4. If the problem persists, perform another soft reset.
5. If possible, synchronize or use the included Sprite Backup utility to back up your most
recent information.
7. Synchronize or restore your backup to refresh the information in your built-in
applications.
Section 7A: Help
373
8. If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time.
9. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to
its developer.
Getting More Help
Contact the author or vendor of any third-party software if you require further assistance.
Sprint does not provide technical support for applications that are not built into your Treo.
Making Room on Your Treo
If you store a large number of records, or install many third-party applications, the internal
memory on your Treo may fill up. Here are some ways to clear space on your device:
ⅷ
ⅷ
Camera: Large images take up a lot of memory. Move images to an expansion card, or
Email: Email attachments can consume excessive memory. Move attachments to an
expansion card, or delete large files from your Treo (see “Managing Your Messages” on
ⅷ
ⅷ
Internet: If you save links to pages you’ve visited in Internet Explorer Mobile, you may want
Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications or move them to
an expansion card (see “Copying or Moving Applications and Files Between Your Treo
Also, remember that your Treo includes an expansion card slot, and that you can store
applications and information on expansion cards. However, you still need free memory on the
device itself to run applications from an expansion card.
374
Section 7A: Help
Voice Quality
Is the Other Person Hearing an Echo?
ⅷ Try decreasing the volume on your Treo to avoid coupling or feedback on the other
person’s end. This applies to both the speakerphone and to the handset earpiece.
ⅷ Position the Treo closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back to the microphone.
Keep your hand away from the microphone hole in the lower-left corner of your device.
ⅷ If you’re using Speakerphone mode with your Treo lying on a flat surface, try turning the
device face-down (screen facing the surface).
Are You Hearing Your Own Voice Echo?
Ask the other person to turn down their volume or to hold the Treo closer to their ear.
Is Your Voice Too Quiet on the Other End?
Be sure to hold the bottom of the Treo, or the hands-free microphone, close to your mouth.
Check the signal strength-indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with
better coverage.
Section 7A: Help
375
376
Section 7A: Help
Section 7B
Glossary
1xRTT: A standard of wireless Internet connectivity that allows for persistent data connections
as long as you are actively using your data connection. The average data transmission rate is
about 70Kbps, although theoretical limits are 153.6Kb/s. With Sprint Power VisionSM plans, you
pay a monthly rate for unlimited data transfer and you don’t pay for connection time.
ActiveSync®: The software on your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device that exchanges and
updates the information on your Treo with the information on your computer.
ActiveSync Desktop Software: The software on your Windows XP computer that exchanges
and updates the information on your computer with the information on your Treo. To open
ActiveSync on your computer, double-click the ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your screen. If the icon does not appear, click Start > All Programs >
Auto-off interval: The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your Treo turns off.
The wireless features on your device are unaffected by this setting.
Beam: The process of sending or receiving an entry or application using the infrared port on
your Treo or using Bluetooth® wireless technology.
Bluetooth® wireless technology: Technology that enables devices such as Treo smart
devices, wireless phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can
exchange information over short distances.
Section 7B: Glossary
377
Desktop software: A PIM application for computers, such as Microsoft® Outlook®, that helps
you manage your personal information and keep your personal information synchronized
with your Treo.
Dial-up networking: Wireless technology that enables you to convert your Treo into a wireless
modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer.
Direct Push technology: A two-way wireless delivery method used between Microsoft
Exchange Server 2007, or Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2, and a Treo
with Windows Mobile® 6.1 with MSFP (Messaging and Security Feature Pack). Microsoft Direct
Push technology enables features such as Tasks Over The Air (OTA), and IP-based push
updating of Outlook information (Inbox, Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks).
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized): A wireless broadband technology (also known as EVDO)
that is designed for very high-speed data transfer with average download speeds of 400 to
700Kbps and that is capable of reaching speeds up to a theoretical maximum of 3.2Mbps,
and upload speeds up to 1.8Mbps. The Sprint Mobile Broadband Network uses EVDO
technology. Your Treo supports EVDO Rev 0 and Rev A technologies.
Global Address List (GAL): An online address book for Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or
Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service Pack 2. The GAL contains names, email
addresses, and other information, and is created and maintained by your Exchange server
administrator.
Infrared (IR): A way of transmitting information using light waves. The IR port on your Treo
lets you transfer information between other IR devices within a short radius.
Lithium-ion (li-ion): The rechargeable battery technology used in your device.
Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager: A security management platform that
enables system administrators to set and implement security policies by remotely controlling
mobile devices. This platform also enables users to access corporate information on
networks with firewalls.
Mobile Broadband Network: An advanced wireless data network using the fastest
commercially available wireless network technology (EVDO) to deliver broadband-like transfer
speeds for your data connections.
378
Section 7B: Glossary
Partnership: Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your Treo and a hands-free device—that
can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you
form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that
device. Partnership is known on some devices as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device,
or trusted pair.
Phone as Modem: The feature that enables your device (when connected to the mobile
broadband network) to be used as a high-speed modem for your computer, using a wired
(USB sync cable) connection.
Phone Off: The icon that indicates when the phone feature is not connected to any wireless
phone network. You can still use the organizer and other features.
PIM (personal information manager): A category of software that includes applications such
as Microsoft Outlook, Palm® Desktop software, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store
contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos.
SMS (Short Messaging Service): The service that exchanges short text messages almost
instantly between wireless devices. These messages can usually include up to 160
characters. Your Treo can send and receive text messages while you are on a voice call.
Sprint 1xRTT: The next generation of wireless Internet access that enables you to check your
email and browse the Web.
SSID: The name that identifies a Wi-Fi network. If a network does not broadcast its SSID, you
must get the SSID from the system administrator in order to connect to the network.
Synchronization: The process in which information that is entered or updated on your Treo,
your computer, or a server is updated in one of the other locations either wirelessly or by
Username: The name associated with your Treo that distinguishes it from other Windows
Mobile devices. When you first synchronize your device, you are asked to give it a username.
Wi-Fi access point: A network device with an antenna that provides wireless connections to a
larger network. Also called a hotspot.
Windows Mobile®: The operating system of your Treo. Your device uses the Windows Mobile
6.1 Professional edition of this operating system.
Section 7B: Glossary
379
382
Section 8A
Important Safety Information
In This Section
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ This guide contains important operational and safety information that helps
you safely use your Palm® Treo™ 800W smart device. Failure to read and
follow the information provided in this guide may result in serious bodily
injury, death, or property damage.
WARNING
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
383
General Precautions
There are several simple guidelines for operating your Treo properly and maintaining safe,
satisfactory service.
ⅷ Speak directly into the microphone.
ⅷ Avoid exposing your Treo and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your Treo does get wet,
immediately turn the power off and remove the battery.
ⅷ Although your Treo is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
ⅷ Any changes or modifications to your Treo not expressly approved in this document could
void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.
For the best care of your Treo, be sure that only Sprint authorized personnel
services your Treo and accessories. Failure to do so may be dangerous and
may void your warranty.
Note
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Palm® Treo™ 800W
Smart Device
Do Not Rely on the Phone Feature of Your Treo for Emergency Calls
Wireless phones, such as the one on your Treo, operate using radio signals, which cannot
guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless
phone for essential communication (for example, medical emergencies). Emergency calls
may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain network services and/or phone
features are in use. Check with your local service provider for details.
384
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Using Your Phone While Driving
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free device) is
prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety
always comes first.
Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint Store, or
Tip
Following Safety Guidelines
To operate your Treo safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations in a given
area. Turn the phone feature of your device off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may
cause interference or danger.
Using Your Treo Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However,
RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic equipment.
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating
systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or
their representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF
signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to
your vehicle.
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing
aids, to determine whether they are adequately shielded from external RF signals.
Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission
before using the phone near medical equipment.
Note
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
385
Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference with aircraft
systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have
permission from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the ground. To
prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is
in the air.
Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone off when in a blasting area or in
other areas with signs indicating that two-way radios should be turned off. Construction crews
often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a potentially explosive atmosphere.
Although it’s rare, your phone and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an
explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are often, but not always,
clearly marked. They include:
ⅷ Fueling areas such as gas stations.
ⅷ Below deck on boats.
ⅷ Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.
ⅷ Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
ⅷ Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s engine.
Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquid, or explosives in
the compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories.
Note
Restricting Children’s Access to Your Treo
Your Treo is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it; they could hurt themselves and
others, damage the Treo and/or its phone, or make calls that increase your Sprint charges.
386
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device
Your Treo 800W smart device is compliant with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
requirements. For additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product, please
Your Treo has been tested for hearing aid device compatibility. When some wireless phones
are used near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may detect
a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed ratings for some of their wireless phones, to
assist hearing device users in finding phones that may be compatible with their hearing
devices. Not all phones have been rated. Phones that have been rated have a label on the
box. Your Treo 800W smart device phone has an M4/T4 rating.
These ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary, depending on the level of immunity of your
hearing device and degree of your hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be
vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone successfully. Trying out
the phone with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs.
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less
interference with hearing devices than phones that are not labeled. M4 is the better/higher of
the two ratings.
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to be more usable
with a hearing device’s telecoil (“T Switch” or “Telephone Switch”) than unrated phones. T4 is
the better/higher of the two ratings. (Note that not all hearing devices contain telecoils.)
The more immune your hearing aid device is, the less likely you are to experience
interference noise from your wireless phone. Hearing aid devices should have ratings similar
to those of phones. Ask your hearing health care professional for the rating of your hearing
aid. Add the rating of your hearing aid and your phone to determine probable usability:
ⅷ Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers best use.
ⅷ Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
387
ⅷ Any combined rating equal to four is considered usable.
Thus, if you pair an M3 hearing aid with an M3 phone, you have a combined rating of six for
“best use.” The same applies for T ratings.
Sprint further suggests that you experiment with multiple phones (even those not labeled
M3/T3 or M4/T4) while in the store to find the one that works best with your hearing aid
device. If you experience interference or find the quality of service unsatisfactory after
purchasing your device, promptly return it to the store within 30 days of purchase. With the
Sprint 30-day Risk-Free Guarantee, you may return the device within 30 days of purchase for
a full refund, and you will only be responsible for charges based on your actual usage.
Getting the Best Hearing Device Experience With Your Treo
To further minimize interference:
ⅷ There is usually less interference on the microphone setting than on the telecoil setting.
ⅷ Set the phone’s screen and keyboard backlight settings to ensure the minimum time
ⅷ Move the phone around to find the point with the least interference.
Caring for the Battery
Protecting Your Battery
The following guidelines will help you get the most out of your battery’s performance:
ⅷ Recently there have been some public reports of wireless phone batteries overheating,
catching fire, or exploding. It appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve
counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with unknown or questionable
manufacturing standards. Sprint is not aware of similar problems with Treo smart devices
resulting from the proper use of batteries and accessories approved by Sprint or by the
manufacturer of your phone. Use only batteries and accessories that have been approved
by Sprint or by the manufacturer of your Treo, and that are found at Sprint Stores or
388
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
through manufacturer of your Treo, or call 1-866-343-1114 to order them. They’re also
best way to ensure that they’re genuine and safe.
ⅷ To avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32° F to 113° F
(0° C to 45° C).
ⅷ Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas such as the
bathroom.
ⅷ Never dispose of the battery by incineration.
ⅷ Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
ⅷ The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time.
ⅷ It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. It can
be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.
ⅷ Don’t store the battery in high-temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s best to follow
these storage rules:
Ⅲ Less than one month: –4° F to 140° F (–20° C to 60° C)
Ⅲ Less than three months: –4F to 104F (–20C to 40C)
Ⅲ Less than one year: –4F to 68F (–20C to 20C)
CTIA (Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association)
Battery Handling Guidelines
ⅷ Use and/or replace the battery and charging system only with the battery or charging
system specified for this phone. Use of an unqualified battery or charger, or improper
battery use, may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
ⅷ Do not disassemble, open, crush, bend, deform, puncture, or shred the battery.
ⅷ Do not short-circuit the battery or allow metallic conductive objects to contact the battery
terminals.
ⅷ Do not modify or remanufacture the battery, attempt to insert foreign objects into the
battery, immerse it or expose it to water or other liquids, or expose it to fire, explosion, or
other hazard.
ⅷ Battery usage by children should be supervised.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
389
ⅷ Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If you drop the phone or battery, especially on a
hard surface, and you suspect damage, take it to a service center for inspection.
ⅷ Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations.
Disposal of Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) Batteries
To avoid being burned, do not handle a damaged or leaking lithium-ion (li-ion) battery.
For safe disposal options of your li-ion batteries, contact your nearest Sprint authorized
service center.
Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of
batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy
Understanding How Your Phone Operates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it receives and
transmits radio frequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your
call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital
mode.
Knowing Radio Frequency Safety
The design of your Treo complies with updated NCRP standards described below.
In 1991–92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels
with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers and
physicians from universities, government health agencies and industries developed this
updated standard after reviewing the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In
August 1996, the FCC adopted a hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE
390
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
standard and the guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP).
Body-Worn Operation
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a handset on your
body, use the carrying case, holster, or other body-worn accessory that is supplied by or
approved by Sprint. Use of accessories that are nor approved by Sprint may violate FCC RF
exposure guidelines.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) for Wireless Phones
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the
head of a user of a wireless handset.
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring, and calculation
process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested at
their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a phone can
be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors
including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone design, and other factors. What is
important to remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs
do not represent a variation in safety.
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety.
As stated above, variations in SAR values between different models of phones do not mean
variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered
safe for use by the public.
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
391
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo 800W smart device are as follows:
Maximum Scaled SAR Values (W/kg) FCC
CDMA 2000
Cellular
CDMA 2000
PCS
WLAN
Co-location
Head
Body
0.837
0.577
1.420
0.456
0.067
0.018
1.433
0.595
FCC Radio Frequency Emission
This phone meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission Guidelines and is certified with the
FCC as:
FCC ID number: O8F-715
IC ID number: 3905A-715
More information on the phone’s SAR can be found from the following FCC Web site:
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Treo
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the
device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.
Description of ESD
Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the
surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up
electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the discharge event—when you touch a metal
doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
392
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
ESD-Susceptible Equipment
Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take
measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm® Treo, from ESD harm.
While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and,
unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic
device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking
stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Treo,
build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your
body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another
device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.
Precautions Against ESD
Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices
before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your Treo to
your computer, placing the Treo in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do
this in many ways, including the following:
ⅷ Ground yourself when you’re holding your Treo, by simultaneously touching a metal
surface that is at earth ground. For example, if your computer has a metal case and is
plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge
the ESD on your body.
ⅷ Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
ⅷ Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Conditions That Enhance ESD Occurrences
Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the
following:
ⅷ Low relative humidity.
ⅷ Material type (the type of material gathering the charge; for example, synthetics are more
prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton).
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
393
ⅷ The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are
in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to
protect your electronic equipment against ESD.
Owner’s Record
The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are located on a nameplate inside
the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will be
helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the future.
Model: Treo 800W Smart Device
Serial No.:
User Guide Proprietary Notice
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the
following patents:
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569
5,490,165 5,511,073
User Guide template version 7B (November 2007)
394
Section 8A: Important Safety Information
Specifications
Radio
ⅷ CDMA 800 (Digital Cellular), 1900 (PCS), and 1.5GHz (GPS)
ⅷ EVDO (Rev 0, Rev A) and 1XRTT
Phone features
ⅷ Personal speakerphone
ⅷ MicroUSB standard B connector (2.0-compliant; for sync cable,
charger, and audio accessories)
ⅷ External antenna port
ⅷ Microphone mute option
ⅷ 3-way calling
ⅷ HAC compatible (M4/T4 rating)
Processor
ⅷ TI processor
technology
Expansion
Battery
ⅷ microSD/SDHC card slot
ⅷ Rechargeable lithium-ion
ⅷ Removable for replacement
ⅷ 3 hours to be fully charged
Operating system
Camera
ⅷ Windows Mobile® 6.1 Professional
ⅷ Still image capture resolution: 1600 x 1200, 2.0 megapixel
ⅷ Video capture resolution: 176 x 144 and 320 x 240 pixels
ⅷ Automatic light balance
Size
ⅷ 4.41 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.73 in. (112mm x 58mm x 18.5mm)
Weight
ⅷ 4.94 ounces (140 grams)
396
Section 8B: Specifications
Connectivity
Display
ⅷ Wi-Fi (802.11b/g, 802.1x with EAP-PEAP, EAP-TLS)
ⅷ Infrared (1.2-compliant)
ⅷ Bluetooth® wireless technology (Complies with Bluetooth 2.0+EDR
specification. Supports GAP, GOEP [OBEX], SPP, SDAP, OPP, HSP,
HFP 1.5, A2DP, AVRCP, PAN, PBAP, Microsoft® ActiveSync®
technology, and BPP.)
ⅷ 320 x 320 pixel touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
ⅷ 65,536 colors (16-bit color)
ⅷ User-adjustable brightness
Keyboard
ⅷ Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
ⅷ Backlight for low lighting conditions
Included software
ⅷ Today/Phone (includes Speed Dial and Dial Pad)
ⅷ Messaging (text and email)
ⅷ Internet Explorer® Mobile (Web browser)
ⅷ Maps
ⅷ Camera
ⅷ Pictures & Videos
ⅷ Windows Media® Player Mobile
ⅷ File Explorer
ⅷ Contacts
ⅷ Calendar
ⅷ Tasks
ⅷ Notes
ⅷ Calculator
ⅷ ActiveSync® (device and desktop software)
ⅷ Microsoft Direct Push technology
ⅷ Windows Live
Section 8B: Specifications
397
Included software
(continued)
ⅷ Excel® Mobile
ⅷ Word Mobile
ⅷ PowerPoint® Mobile
ⅷ OneNote® Mobile
ⅷ Handmark Pocket Express
ⅷ Solitaire
ⅷ Bubble Breaker
ⅷ Astraware Sudoku
ⅷ Aces Texas Hold’em Limit
ⅷ Voice Command
ⅷ My Treo
ⅷ Quick Tour
ⅷ Search
ⅷ Terminal Services
ⅷ Picsel PDF Viewer
ⅷ Sprite Backup
ⅷ Bejeweled 2 (on CD)
ⅷ WorldMate (on CD)
System
ⅷ Windows XP Service Pack 2, or Windows Vista® with USB port.
requirements
Later versions may also be supported.
ⅷ Some wireless features require Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
with Service Pack 2 or later.
Operating and
storage
temperature range
ⅷ 32°F to 113°F (0°C to 45°C)
ⅷ 5% to 90% RH
398
Section 8B: Specifications
animation 272
appointments
anniversaries 244
applications
See also third-party applications
accessing 70, 324
adding 243, 244
deleting 248
viewing 242
closing 69, 71
attachments
copying 304
adding 137
deleting 300, 374
downloading 298
opening 139
sending 153
installing 296–299, 373
storing 374
troubleshooting 370
audio 82, 223, 227
authentication 134, 369
Index
401
See also spell checking
inserting 28
maximizing 31–32
birthdays 244
Blazer. See Web browsing; Web pages
Bluetooth devices
adding 197
connect
discovering 199
B
backlight 63, 339
battery
charging 29–30, 344
402
Index
bonus software. See built-in applications
C
calculations 256, 273, 277
See also specific application
built-in camera. See camera
buttons
calendar
displaying 242
disabling 328
highlighting 58
reassigning 256, 324
Cal
calls. See phone calls
Index
403
closing
menus 60
troubleshooting 356–359
commands. See menu items; voice
commands
computers. See PCs
connections
See also Internet connections; wireless
connections
connectivity 397
Contacts
contacts
adding 87, 141, 160, 238
displaying 77, 239
changing 341
Index
405
screen 318, 322–323
deleting
applications 300, 374
certificates 336
cutting. See deleting
contacts 241
documents 269
events 248
files 296
notes 255, 287
D
data 274, 278, 282
See also information
dates 278, 333, 334
par
tnerships 198
sounds 100, 322
tasks 252
text 59
workbooks 284
worksheets 284
Index
407
See also synchronization application
devices
See also Bluetooth devices; Treo
display 397
displaying
appointments 242
calendar 242
troubleshooting 336
contacts 77, 239
dialing 76–81, 89
documents 263, 264, 276
menus 60
notes 286
notifications 321
See also online address books
playlists 232
408
Index
tasks 251, 252
Outlook 23
videos 216, 230
ringtones 99, 176
drawing 253
E
documentation 14, 22
documents
changing 263
creating 263, 265
earpiece 25
echoes 375
editing. See changing
email
enter
deleting 269
displaying 263, 264, 276
opening 265
saving 263, 267, 270
downloading
attachments 139–140, 152
files 176, 298
forwarding 145
saving 137
sending 124, 137, 150, 151, 174
images 176
Index
409
synchronizing 138, 167
troubleshooting 368–370
email accounts
errors 336, 356
deleting 135
events
selecting 136, 147
categorizing 248
troubleshooting 368
creating 244
deleting 248
filtering 248
emoticons 158, 168
encoding 177
entering
PINs 331
erasing. See deleting
Exchange Servers
expansion cards
adding 301
formatting 301
410
Index
inserting 302
file types
documents 263, 270
music 226
videos 216
removing 302
files
browsing 295, 305
copying 271
downloading 176, 298
opening 229, 295
sendi
ng 153, 168
synchronizing 206, 260
filtering
events 248
information 240, 281
tasks 251
F
See also built-in applications
favorites 44, 174, 174–175
See also Web pages
fields 57, 62
Index
411
See also online address books
Global Positioning System. See GPS devices
highlighting
text 59, 267
H
hands-free devices
troubleshooting 358
hotspots 379
HotSync cable. See USB sync cable
hyperlinks 286, 287
See also URLs; Web links
Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
I
icons. See specific icon or button
hiding
appointments 247
Index
413
See also pictures
Inbox 159, 161
installing
information
Outlook 43
accessing 40
beaming 200, 201
interference 200, 388
entering 63, 64–66, 173, 326, 332
filtering 240, 281
Internet 116, 171, 341
finding 294
losing 350
moving 304
Internet connections
protecting 40, 328, 331
restoring 350
adding 341
ending 343
saving 303
launching 117, 341
opening 69, 172
sorting 280
storing 301, 374
troubleshooting 357
updating 41, 307
414
Index
Internet Message Access Protocol. See IMAP
Internet service providers. See ISPs
invitations. See meeting requests
IR port. See infrared port
ISPs 130, 132, 341
items on screen
displaying 247
highlighting 57, 58
Keyguard 328, 329
L
LANs. See local area networks
K
keyboard
locking 329
links. See Web links
lists
closing 62
creating 268, 286
displaying 263, 264
formatting 267
Index
415
meeting invitations. See meeting requests
See also expansion cards
Microsoft ActiveSync. See ActiveSync
Microsoft applications. See specific
application
memos. See messages; notes
menus 60
Microsoft operating systems. See Windows
Microsoft System Center Mobile Device
messages
mirror 26, 213
See also text messages; voice notes
filtering 143, 152
saving 137
modems 116, 379
mouthpiece 25
Index
417
moving
information 304
workbooks 275, 283
worksheets 279
text 266
navigator. See 5-way navigator
network connections
troubleshooting 356–359
workbooks 283
multimedia files. See media files
See also media files
nonwireless features. See organizer features
N
naming
notebook 285
notes
See also voice notes
418
Index
creating 252, 254, 285
deleting 255, 287
numbers
displaying 286
organizing 255
copying 257
saving 255, 256
sorting 287
O
See also specific Office application
online address books
notifications
closing 159
displaying 321
selecting 320
troubleshooting 358
See also playlists
adding 141, 141–143
onl
opening
Index
419
phone calls
blocking 104
ending 87, 89
forwarding 88
selecting 79, 144
ignoring 82
photos. See pictures
pictures
phone numbers
deleting 221
adding 102
checking 37
downloading 176
editing 220, 221
copying 79, 81
organizing 218
previewing 213, 372
renaming 221
highlighting 59
rotating 220, 222
saving 223
saving 87
sending 168, 218, 222
422
Index
sorting 219
Post Office Protocol. See POP accounts
troubleshooting 372
PINs 331
precautions 384, 393
playback
ending 230
playing
presentations 270, 271
previewing
ringtones 100
sounds 321
sounds 321
playlists 228, 230, 232
plug-ins 171, 319
videos 215
processor 396
Pocket Outlook. See Inbox application
programs. See applications; software
Index
423
protecting
information 328, 331
Treo 328–333
redialing 80
reminders
repeating 321
Q
removing
R
radio 396
renaming
not
es 255, 287
workbooks 283
rechargeable battery. See battery
recording
ringtones 100
sounds 321
videos 214–215
worksheets 280
recurring appointments. See repeating
appointments
424
Index
replacing
text 266, 327
ringtones
downloading 99, 176
previewing 100
Require SSL for Incoming e-mail check
box 134
recording 100
selecting 99–100
Require SSL for Outgoing e-mail check
silencing 319
box 134
resizing
restoring
information 350
S
Save l
saving
sounds 320
information 303
notes 255, 256
Index
425
workbooks 272, 275, 284
scrolling 57, 247, 328
SD cards. See expansion cards
searching
documents 266
screen
aligning 323
troubleshooting 355
sending 198, 201
426
Index
sounds 322
slider 57
settings. See options
messaging
smart device. See Treo
Show time stamps of each message
option 163
See also applications
songs. See music
sorting
files 295
Index
427
formatting 267, 285
highlighting 59, 267
indenting 268
text messages
addressing 157
creating 157
deleting 162, 163
displaying 159, 160
forwarding 160
T
tasks
adding 250
deleting 252
displaying 251, 252
organizing 251
prioritizing 250
templates
text
receiving 158,
sending 82, 158
troubleshooting 358
aligning 268, 272
correcting 137, 268, 327
deleting 59
430
Index
themes 318
troubleshooting 367
tones. See ringtones; sounds
touchscreen. See screen
third-party applications
losing 350
purchasing 299
troubleshooting 373–374
throughput 188
time 333, 334
Treo
activating 23, 36
timer 213
Today screen
accessing 76
locking 328, 330
losing 52, 332
operating 384, 385
Index
431
storing 25
troubleshooting 348
unlocking 330, 331
V
videos
troubleshooting 348
U
unlocking
Treo 330, 331
updating
deleting 221
editing 221
information 41, 307
organizing 218
URLs 144, 230, 270
See also Web links
previewing 215
recording 214–215
renaming 221
replaying 229
saving 223
selecting 230
432
Index
sending 218
sorting 219
viewing
virtual private networks. See VPN connections
appointments 242
calendar 242
voicemail
retrieving 83, 84
contacts 77, 239
menus 60
troubleshooting 102
notes 286
notifications 321
VPN connections
adding 342
pictures 216, 287
playlists 232
tasks 251, 252
videos 216, 230
W
Warn when page content is blocked…
option 178
Index
433
warnings 321
Web links
Wi-Fi connections
adding 191
customizing 194
creating 286
disconnecting 194
highlighting 58
opening 287
organizing 175
selecting 144
sending 173
Web pages
accessing 171, 172, 188
bookmarking 174
troubleshooting 370–371
See also specific program
Windows Media Player. See Media Player
Mobile
See also sync software
Web sites. See Internet; Web pages
434
Index
See also Wi-Fi connections
WLANs. See wireless networks
See also workbooks
See also documents
Y
workbooks
See also Excel Mobile application;
spreadsheets
Z
creating 274, 275
zoom settings
input 327
pictures 287
deleting 284
Index
435
436
Index
|
